Electrical Engineer User Guide

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 387

AVEVA Electrical

Engineer
User Guide
AVEVA Solutions Limited

Disclaimer
AVEVA Electrical provides cable sizing calculations for estimation purposes only, end users of the software should
not rely on the calculations produced by the software for design purposes. End users should seek the advice of
certified cable suppliers prior to specifying or purchasing cables.

To the fullest extent permissible at law:

a) AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from viruses;

b) AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of
anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any
special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be
suffered by the customer, including any loss suffered by the customer resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of
any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or
arise in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise;

c) AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the
performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the
customer's claim is brought.

In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under
which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.

Copyright
All intellectual property rights, including but not limited to, copyright in this manual and the associated software,
(including source code, object code, and any data) belongs to or is validly licensed by AVEVA Solutions Limited or
its subsidiaries.

All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document
is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without
the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires
that this Disclaimer and Copyright notice is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made.

The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or
electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may also not reverse
engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the associated software. Neither the whole, nor part of the product described in
this publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior
written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly
prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.

The AVEVA products described in this guide are to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the respective licence agreements, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation.
Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the product is strictly prohibited.

Copyright 2000 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.

The AVEVA Electrical user interface is based on the Microsoft® Office Fluent™ user interface.

Trademarks
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries. AVEVA product names are
trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of
trademarks belonging to AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries is strictly forbidden.

Fluent is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation and the Fluent user interface is licensed from Microsoft Corporation.

The Microsoft Office User Interface is subject to protection under U.S. and international intellectual property laws
and is used by AVEVA Solutions Limited under license from Microsoft.

AVEVA Solutions Ltd, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

Revision Sheet

Date Version Comments / Remarks


March 2012 Copyright added to all pages.
March 2013 12.1.SP1 Updates incorporated
August 2013 12.1 SP2 Updates incorporated
July 2014 12.1 SP3 Updates incorporated
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Electrical Engineer User Guide

Electrical Engineer User Guide

Contents Page

Engineer
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Feature Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
AVEVA Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Guide Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3

User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1


Open an AVEVA Electrical Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Electrical Engineer Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Project Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Home Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Manage Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
View Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
List Tools Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Select a Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Select a Colour Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Working with the Data Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Find and Replace Text in a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Advanced Grid Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Grid Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Using PickLists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6

© Copyright 2000 to current year. i 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Datasheet Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Property Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Add New Property Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Edit Property Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
Delete Property Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9
Merge Property Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Import Property Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13
Project Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:14
Compartment Element Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
Create Element Groups and Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:18
Edit Element Groups and Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:19
Delete Element Groups and Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Import Element Types from another Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Tag Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:22
Define a New Tag Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:24
Edit a Tag Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:27
Edit the List of Available Tag Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:28
Class Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30
Create New Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31
Edit Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:32
Delete Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:32
Export Classes to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33
Import Classes from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:34
Assign Tag Formats to Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:38
Equipment Type Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39
Create New Equipment Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41
Edit Equipment Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Delete Equipment Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Export the Equipment Type Catalogue to Excel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Import the Equipment Type Catalogue from Excel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:43
Loading Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:48

Loads List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1


Manually Add a Tag to the Loads List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3

© Copyright 2000 to current year. ii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

Edit a Tag in the Loads List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12


Edit Multiple Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:15
Edit Engineering Data for Multiple Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:15
Edit Tag Formats of Multiple Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:16
Assign Loads to Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:19
Change Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:21
View/Edit Supply Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:21
Unassign Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:21
Assign, View and Edit Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:21
Assign Loads to Datasheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:22
View/Edit Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:22
Copy Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:22
Import Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:22
Import Load Data from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:23
AVEVA P&ID Load Tags Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:31
AVEVA Schematic Model Load Tags Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:34
AVEVA Engineering Load Tags Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:37
AVEVA Diagrams Load Tag Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:38
Create Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:40
Assign Wiring Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:40
Create Wiring for a Single Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:42
Create Wiring for a Multiple Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:43
Single Line Check Reports for Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:44
Attachments (External Documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:45
View Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:45
Attach a Document to a Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:46
Edit Attached Document Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:47
Delete Attached Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:47
Instrument Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:47

Supplies List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1


Manually Add a Tag to the Supplies List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:6
Loads Assigned/Windings Tab - General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8
Loads Assigned Tab - MCCs and Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:9
Loads Assigned Tab - Distribution Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:18
Winding Tab - Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:28
Loads Assigned Tab - Junction Boxes, UPSs, Generators, Miscellaneous Supplies, Variable

© Copyright 2000 to current year. iii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

Speed Drives and Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:33


Detail Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:35
Compartments Tab - MCCs and Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:37
Edit a Tag in the Supplies List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:46
Edit Multiple Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:49
Assign, View and Edit Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:49
Assign Supplies to Datasheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:49
View/Edit Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:49
Copy Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:50
Import Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:50
Import Supply Data from Excel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:50
AVEVA P&ID Supply Tags Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:50
AVEVA Schematic Model Supply Tags Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:50
AVEVA Tags Supply Tags Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:50
AVEVA Diagrams Supply Tags Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:50
Single Line Check Reports for Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:51
Attachments (External Documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:51

Packages List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1


Add Equipment Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2
Edit Packages and Package Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5

Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1


Manually Add a Tag to the Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2
Edit Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:6
Edit Multiple Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:9
Copy Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:10
Import Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:11
Import Equipment Data from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:11
AVEVA P&ID Equipment Tags Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:11
AVEVA Schematic Model Equipment Tags Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:12
AVEVA Tags Equipment Tags Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:12
AVEVA Diagrams Equipment Tags Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:12
Attachments (External Documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:12

Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
View/Edit Equipment Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1

© Copyright 2000 to current year. iv 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

Datasheet Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2


Copy Tag Data during Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:5
Datasheet Change Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7
Datasheets List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9
Add New Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Assign Tags To Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:16
Assign Tags from the Add New Datasheet or Datasheet Information Window . . . . . . . . . 8:16
Batch Assign Multiple Tags to Datasheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:17
Edit Datasheet Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
Delete Datasheet Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20
Print Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20
Datasheet Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:21
Create a Revision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:21
Edit a Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:22
Viewing and Editing Multiple Datasheet Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:23
Datasheet Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:23
View a List of Previous Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:24
Import Datasheets from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:26
Import Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:26
Accept Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:28
Datasheet Publishing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:29
Publishing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:29
Publish Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:30
Merge Datasheets into a Single Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:31
Assign Datasheets to the Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:32
Unassign Datasheets from the Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:33
Enter Basic Document Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:33
Save and Publish the Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:37
Document List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:38
Delete Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:39
Publish Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:40
Document Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:40
Datasheet Form Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:44
Datasheet Catalogue Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:45
Add a New Datasheet Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:46
Edit Catalogue Datasheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:48
Copy Existing Datasheet Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:49

© Copyright 2000 to current year. v 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

Map Database Fields to Datasheet Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:50


Assign a PickList to a Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:52
Checkboxes on Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:53
Auto Create Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:54
Import Catalogue Datasheets From Other Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:56
Deleting a Datasheet Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:58
View Data by Datasheet Form Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:59
Browse Data By Form Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:60
Edit Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:61
Edit Data for Multiple Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:62

Distribution Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1


Distribution Diagrams List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Distribution Diagram Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
Create New Distribution Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:5
View/Edit Distribution Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:7
Create Content of Key One Line Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:17
Add New or Existing Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:18
Manually Connect Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:18
Refresh the Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:22
Disconnect Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:23
Edit Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:24
Create, Size and Add Wiring to Single or Multiple Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:24
Edit Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:26
Add Distribution Board Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:26
Delete Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:27
Reassign Loads to Other Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:29
Change Graphical Order of Compartment Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:30
Add and Edit Distribution Diagram Project Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:31
Pre-Defined Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:31
User-Defined Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:32

Equipment Catalogues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1


Compartment Elements Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Create Catalogue Compartment Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2
Edit Catalogue Compartment Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:3
Compartment Typicals Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:4
Create Compartment Typicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:5
View and Edit Compartment Typical Graphics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:12

© Copyright 2000 to current year. vi 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

Edit Compartment Typicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:15


Update Compartments with changes to Compartment Typicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:16
Motor Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:18
Create Catalogue Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:19
Edit Catalogue Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:20
Import Motor Catalogue Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:21

Exports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Export to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Export to XPS and PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Export Selected Datasheet Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Export Datasheets to a Specified Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:2
Export Datasheets to Pre-Defined Folders with File Names in a Pre-Defined Format. . . . 11:3
Export to AVEVA NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
AVEVA NET Export Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
Export Data from Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:7
Export Reports and Associated Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:8
Export Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:8

Cable Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1


Cable Sizing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1
Calculate Single Cable Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:5
Calculate Multiple Cable Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:10
External Cable Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:13
External Cable Sizing Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:13
Map Database Fields to Cable Sizing Template Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:17
Allocate Cable Sizing Templates to Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:20
Calculate Cable Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:21
Cable Sizing Check Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:25

Work Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1


Change Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
Audit Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
Database Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1

Report Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1


Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1

© Copyright 2000 to current year. vii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

Load Detail Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1


Mechanical Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2
Voltage, Phase, Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2
Nameplate Rated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2
Absorbed Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2
Absorbed Loading Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
Electrical Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
Reactive Electrical Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
Power Factor Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
Active Electrical Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
Corrected Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:5
Full Load Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:5
Supply Detail Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:6
Busbar Diversity Active Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:7
Busbar Diversity Reactive Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:7
Busbar Diversity Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:8
Busbar Diversity Power Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:8
Busbar Diversity Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:9
Winding Diversity Active Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:9
Winding Diversity Reactive Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:9
Winding Diversity Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:9
Winding Diversity Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:9
Winding Diversity Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:9
Busbar Maximum Demand Active Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:10
Busbar Maximum Demand Reactive Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:10
Busbar Maximum Demand Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:10
Busbar Maximum Demand Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:11
Busbar Maximum Demand Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:11
Load Summary Diversity Active Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:12
Load Summary Diversity Reactive Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:12
Load Summary Diversity Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:13
Load Summary Diversity Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:13
Load Summary Diversity Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:14
Load Summary Maximum Demand Active Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:14
Load Summary Maximum Demand Reactive Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:14
Load Summary Maximum Demand Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:15
Load Summary Maximum Demand Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:15

© Copyright 2000 to current year. viii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

Load Summary Maximum Demand Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:15


Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:16
Load Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:16
Electrical Load Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:16
Nameplate Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Absorbed Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Utilization Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Apparent Load Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Reactive Load Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Line Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Phase Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:18
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:18

AVEVA NET Export Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B:1

© Copyright 2000 to current year. ix 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

© Copyright 2000 to current year. x 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Introduction

1 Introduction

The Electrical Engineer User Guide is designed to help users learn how to use the Electrical
Engineer module of AVEVA Electrical.
Electrical Engineer manages all tasks typically handled by an Electrical Engineer during a
project life cycle:
• Managing all project electrical equipment data.
• Generating electrical equipment datasheets or spec sheets automatically from the
AVEVA Electrical database in Microsoft Excel format.
• Creating electrical equipment tags and their wiring data (terminals, cables, wire
terminations and wire numbers etc) automatically from "Wiring Rules" directly into
AVEVA Electrical Wiring Manager database.
• Using data from Electrical Engineer to generate Schematic and Single Line diagrams in
AVEVA Electrical Designer.
• Producing reports on electrical equipment data.
For more information refer to Feature Overview.

1.1 Feature Overview


Electrical Engineer includes the following features:

Equipment Lists
• Lists of loads and supplies, and a list of all project electrical equipment including
powered equipment from Wiring Manager, lists of equipment packages and lists of
instruments with power requirements from a shared AVEVA Instrumentation project.
• User-definable Grid Views (viewable columns, captions, default column widths, default
sort order and data filters).
• Adding/Editing equipment and maintain equipment list data.
• Printing, sorting and filtering lists 'on the fly'.
• Exporting Grid Views to Excel.
• Importing from Excel.
• Attaching external documents/files to electrical equipment tags (PDF, Word, Excel,
various picture formats etc.) and viewing these documents.
• Support for several tag formats.
• Datasheet document numbers can be updated from Datasheet list.
• Defining "Wiring Rules" for each tag and generate all cables, terminals and wire
terminations in the Wiring Manager application.
• Change management: Report all tags added, deleted and renamed. Report detail
changes in each field.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 1:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Introduction

• Exporting equipment data to AVEVA NET.

Datasheets (Specifications)
• Assigning equipment to datasheets (supports multiple tags per datasheet).
• Control printing and updating of datasheets in 'batch' mode.
• Document management - control document revisions etc.
• Datasheets use Microsoft Excel spreadsheets to define form layouts.
• Datasheets are stand-alone documents (Excel spreadsheets) for easy exchange with
third parties.
• Importing and exporting data from spreadsheets completed by vendor or client etc.,
highlight changes, accept and reject etc.
• Fully user definable datasheet design (form layout and cell/database mapping and user
table design).
• Copy datasheet design (form layout/setup etc.) from other AVEVA Electrical projects.
• Tools to copy data from other tags and/or datasheets.
• Import/export data from/to Excel (highlight changes, accept/reject etc.).
• Viewing/editing data in a grid for easier management of data across multiple
datasheets and tags.
• Viewing/editing all datasheet data by form type in a grid for easier management of all
data across multiple datasheets and tags.
• Change Management: Highlight changes between Issues (revisions).
• Viewing of previous Issues.
• Printing datasheets to PDF format files.
• Merging of multiple datasheets into single documents for joint publication. Documents
are accessible from Documents grid.
• Exporting datasheet data to AVEVA NET.

Distribution Diagrams
• Single Line diagrams and Key One Line diagrams can be created.
• Single Line diagrams are created by specifying a supply or a load for which a supply
has been defined. The diagram is then created automatically for the supply, with its
loads etc included.
• Key One Line diagrams are created by adding symbols to a blank diagram and
connecting them. When a symbol or cable is added to a Key One Line diagram, an
equipment item or cable is automatically created with default data.
• The symbols used on diagrams may be edited and new symbols created.
• Existing equipment can be dragged and dropped from the Loads of Supplies lists onto
a diagram.
• The layout of a diagram is fully editable.
• Diagrams can be printed and exported to PDF and AutoCAD.
• The user can create, edit and size cables for links between equipment.

Change Management
• Report all equipment/datasheets added, deleted and renamed.
• Report detail changes in each field (e.g. Model No now XXXX was YYYY).
• Log changes for future reporting).
• Audit Manager enables users to view changes by object type.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 1:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Introduction

Reports
Electrical Engineer supports a number of user definable reports, including:
• Equipment List
• Load List
• Load Schedule
• Distribution Board Schedule

User Security Rights


An AVEVA Electrical administrator can set security rights for users to enable/disable access
to AVEVA Electrical functionality including:
• Access to AVEVA Electrical application modules - users can be restricted from using
any module (license).
• Access to AVEVA Electrical objects can be restricted to read-only (e.g. a user cannot
add/edit a datasheets) or no access (i.e. the user cannot view an item etc.).
Electrical Engineer objects include project entities such as cables, equipment, datasheets
etc., and catalogues, the importing of data etc.
By default all new projects have the Security Rights features disabled for backward
compatibility with earlier versions of AVEVA Electrical. If security is required it must be
turned on using the AVEVA Electrical Security Manager. Users must then be allocated to
'Security Groups' such as Engineers and Designers, Read-Only Users etc. Refer to the
AVEVA Electrical Security Manager User Guide for more information.

1.2 System Requirements


For the minimum system requirements needed to run AVEVA Electrical, refer to the
Installation User Guide.

1.3 AVEVA Electrical


For an overview of AVEVA Electrical, its features and benefits, refer to the Common
Functionality User Guide.

1.4 Guide Structure

Introduction a brief description of Electrical Engineer.

User Interface an overview of the Electrical Engineer user interface.

Setup describes how to set various Electrical Engineer options and


preferences including general options, work packs, tag
formats, areas, project voltages etc.

Loads List describes how to add and edit loads.

Supplies List describes how to add and edit supplies.

Packages List describes how to add and edit equipment packages.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 1:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Introduction

Equipment List describes the general project equipment list.

Datasheets describes how to add and edit project datasheets for


equipment.

Distribution Diagrams describes how to create distribution diagrams for project


equipment.

Equipment describes the catalogue of user-defined definitions of motors


Catalogues and protection devices for use when creating new equipment.

Exports describes the facilities used to export files of item data and
report PDF files for import into AVEVA NET.

Cable Sizing describes how to size cables.

Work Packs can be created with selected equipment and time scales for a
particular project.

Change Reports describes the in-built Audit Manager that enables users to view
database changes made during your project in the database
audit log.

Report Manager describes the in-built Report Manager that enables users to
create and modify reports.

Load Calculations in explains the how the load calculations work in AVEVA
AVEVA Electrical Electrical

AVEVA NET Export explains the configuration required for AVEVA NET Export.
Configuration Files

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 1:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
User Interface

2 User Interface

When Electrical Engineer starts up, the AVEVA Electrical Engineer window is displayed
showing the Home tab.

The Select an AVEVA Electrical Project window is also displayed.


Continue at:
• Open an AVEVA Electrical Project
• Electrical Engineer Tabs
• Select a Language
• Select a Colour Scheme
• Working with the Data Grid
• Find and Replace Text in a Grid
• Advanced Grid Filters
• Grid Manager
• Using PickLists
• Claims

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 2:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
User Interface

2.1 Open an AVEVA Electrical Project


When an AVEVA Electrical module is started, the Select an AVEVA Electrical Project
window is displayed, from which the required project can be selected. refer to the Common
Functionality User Guide for details.

2.2 Electrical Engineer Tabs


On opening, the Engineer module each displays four tabs: Project, Home, Manage and
View. Once a grid is opened, an optional "List Tools" tab, named after that grid and
containing commands specific to that grid, is displayed, if there are any.
The rest of this section describes those tab options specific to Engineer.
For details of options common to all Electrical modules, refer to the Common Functionality
User Guide.

2.2.1 Project Tab


The Project tab includes the following Engineer-specific options:

Setup Sub Menu

Property Definitions Used to create and edit user defined Property Definitions for
equipment.

Project Voltages Used to define the list of Project Voltages that can be selected
from when defining equipment.

Compartment Used to define the types of elements located in MCC and


Element Types Switchboard compartments. Refer to Compartment Element
Types.

Tag Formats Enables the user to select existing Tag Formats, create new
tag formats and edit existing tag formats.

Class Definitions Provides access to the Class Definitions window, used to


create and edit instrument and loop classes. Refer to Class
Definitions.

Type Code Catalogue Provides access to the Equipment Type Code Catalogue
window, used to create and edit equipment types. Refer to
Equipment Type Catalogue.

Symbols Accesses a sub-menu with two further options:


• Used Defined - used to view, add and edit the user-
definable symbols used on distribution diagrams. Refer to
User-Defined Symbols for further information.
• Pre-Defined - used change the fields selected to label the
pre-defined symbols used on distribution diagrams. Refer
to Pre-Defined Symbols for further information.

Cable Sizing Used to specify the default data used when sizing load cables.
Configuration Refer to Cable Sizing Setup for further information.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 2:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
User Interface

Set Datasheet Export Enables users to define rules to allow datasheet Excel files to
File Name / Folders be automatically renamed when copied out of AVEVA Electrical
into user defined folders. Refer to Export Selected Datasheet
Files.

Drawings Export to Enables users to select where the publishing folder is located,
External System which executable format is required and fields of information
Configuration written for each published item. Refer to Datasheet Publishing.

AVEVA P&ID Import Displays the AVEVA P&ID Data Import Configuration
Configuration window. Refer to AVEVA P&ID Tag Data Import Configuration
for further information.

AVEVA Engineering Displays the AVEVA Engineering Data Import Configuration


Import Configuration window. Refer to AVEVA Engineering Import Configuration for
further information.

AVEVA Diagrams Opens a sub-menu consisting of the following options:


Import Configuration

AVEVA Schematic Displays the AVEVA Schematic Model


Model Import Login window. Refer to AVEVA
Configuration Schematic Model Import Configuration
for further information.

AVEVA Diagrams Displays the AVEVA Diagrams Login


Import window. Refer to AVEVA Diagrams Load
Configuration Tag Import for further information.

Loading Factor Displays the Loading Factor window. Refer to Loading Factors
for further information.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 2:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
User Interface

2.2.2 Home Tab


The following Engineer-specific options are accessed from the Select option in the Lists
and Schedules section:
Under the List heading:

Loads Displays the Loads List, which is used to create and edit project
loads.

Supplies Displays the Supplies List, which is used to create and edit project
supplies

Packages Displays the Packages List, which is used to create and edit
packages of project equipment.

Equipment Displays the Equipment List, a list of all project equipment including
loads and supplies, powered equipment from Wiring Manager and
from shared AVEVA Instrumentation projects.

Datasheets Displays the Datasheets List, which is used to create and edit project
datasheets.

Browse Data by Displays the View Data by Datasheet Form Type list, used view data
Form Type for loads and supplies by datasheet form type.

Document List Displays the Document List, used to view and edit documents
(collections of datasheets).

Distribution Displays the Distribution Diagrams List, used to view and edit
Diagrams distribution diagrams.

Instrument Displays the Instrument Loads list, used to view instruments from a
Loads shared AVEVA Instrumentation project which have power
requirements.

Under the Catalogue heading:

Datasheets Displays the Datasheet Catalogue Grid, a list of user defined


datasheet form definitions.

Motors Displays the Motor Catalogue list, a list of motors that can be
selected from when creating a load of the motor equipment type.

External Cable Displays the External Cable Sizing Catalogue list, a list of
Sizing templates containing calculations for use when sizing cables.

Compartment Displays the Compartment Elements Catalogue list, a list of


Elements compartment elements that can be selected from when defining
the content of MCC and Switchboard compartments.

Compartment Displays the Compartment Typicals Catalogue list, a list of


Typicals typical combinations of compartment elements, which can be
used when defining the content of MCC and Switchboard
compartments.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 2:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
User Interface

2.2.3 Manage Tab


The Manage tab includes the following Engineer-specific options:
In the Integration section:

Publish to AVEVA Used to export data to AVEVA NET. Refer to Export to AVEVA
NET NET.

AVEVA P&ID Import Used to import data from AVEVA P&ID. Refer to AVEVA P&ID
Load Tags Import.

AVEVA Diagrams Used to import data from AVEVA Diagrams. Refer to AVEVA
Import Configuration Diagrams Load Tag Import for further information.

AVEVA Engineering Opens a sub-menu consisting of the following options:


Import Configuration

AVEVA Schematic Used to import model data from AVEVA


Model Import Schematic Model. Refer to AVEVA
Schematic Model Load Tags Import.

AVEVA Tags Used to import instrument data from


Integration AVEVA Tags. Refer to AVEVA
Configuration Engineering Load Tags Import for further
information.

In the Import section:

From Other Project Used to catalogue datasheets from another project. Refer to
Import Catalogue Datasheets From Other Project

2.2.4 View Tab


All options on the view tab are common to all AVEVA Electrical modules.

2.2.5 List Tools Tab


The List Tools tab contains options specific to the grid which is currently being viewed, if
there are any. If no grid is open, the tab will not be displayed.
The name of the tab will be the name of the current grid.

2.3 Select a Language


If required, a different language can be selected. For a description of this functionality, refer
to the Common Functionality User Guide.

2.4 Select a Colour Scheme


If required, a different colour scheme can be selected. For a description of this functionality,
refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 2:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
User Interface

2.5 Working with the Data Grid


For a description of the generic functionality of Data Grids used in all AVEVA Electrical
applications, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

2.6 Find and Replace Text in a Grid


Any text string within a grid can be found, highlighted and optionally replaced. For a
description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

2.7 Advanced Grid Filters


Advanced (complex) filters can be applied to a grid. For a description of this functionality,
refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

2.8 Grid Manager


The Grid Manager allows users to define their own sets of data fields (columns), default
column orders, default sorting and predefined data filters for most grids. For a description of
this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

2.9 Using PickLists


Many grid cells, datasheet cells and window fields can be, or must be, completed by
selecting from lists of values. These “Pick Lists” can be edited if required. For a description
of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

2.10 Claims
If a user attempts to edit an item which is currently being edited by another item, a message
is displayed to inform the user that the item is locked. For details of how to unlock claims,
refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 2:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

3 Setup

A number of setup procedures may need to be carried out to specify options and for
entering and setting up data required when specifying engineering data. Continue at:
• Options
• Property Definitions
• Project Voltages
• Compartment Element Types
• Tag Formats
• Class Definitions
• Equipment Type Catalogue
• Loading Factors

3.1 Options
The Options window enables the user to specify various miscellaneous project settings,
including several options relating to datasheets.
To open the Options window, select Options from the Project tab.
The window includes two tabs:
• General Tab
• Datasheet Tab

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

3.1.1 General Tab

Select the cable sizing standard to be used from the Cable Sizing Standard list.
If sizing of zero length cables is to be enabled, check the Allow Zero Length Cable Sizing
checkbox. In the Default Length field enter the default length that will be used when sizing
cables for which a length has not been entered.

Note: Refer to Cable Sizing for details of the Cable Sizing facility.

Select the default voltage for new equipment in the Default Voltage list.
If the short circuit calculation is to use the calculated cable temperature by default, click Use
Calculated Cable Temperature. If the short circuit calculation is to use the conductor
temperature by default, click Use Conductor Temperature.

Note: The list of voltages is maintained using the Voltages window. See Project Voltages
for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Select the default power units to be used when specifying motors (kW or hp) from the Motor
Power Units list.
Enter the names to be used to identify phases in the Phase Naming fields.

3.1.2 Datasheet Tab

Set the number of revisions that appear in the revision history list by entering a number in
the Maximum Number of Revisions in History List field.
Specify which fields are to be available for the entry and display of information relating to
revisions by checking or unchecking the Use checkboxes in the Name Captions section as
required.
To change a field name caption, enter the required text in the Caption field. If no text is
entered into the Caption fields and the Use checkbox is checked, the default name shown
in the Field Name column will be used.
The properties of each datasheet include an "of" value. For example, a datasheet may be
sheet 1 of 2. If this value (e.g. "2") is to be calculated either by simply totalling the number of

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

sheets with the same datasheet number, the Use 1st sheet No. as starting value for sum
should be unchecked.
If the first sheet number (i.e. the lowest) is to be used as the basis for this calculation, this
checkbox should be checked. In other words, when the lowest number is more than one,
then the sheets with lower numbers that are implied to exist are taken into account.
If this setting is changed, a message will be displayed when preferences are saved asking
whether or not sheet numbers for existing datasheets should be recalculated. If No is
clicked, the change will only be applied to datasheets subsequently created or updated.

Note: To save any changes and close the Options window, click Save. Click Cancel to
close the window without any changes.

3.2 Property Definitions


AVEVA Electrical supports user-defined properties for use when creating equipment
datasheets and when defining equipment. These properties enable users to create
meaningful attribute names for data that has no other logical property or field within the
project database. Properties can belong to one of two Property Type groups:
• Equipment Properties
• Process Properties
Once created, a new property can be assigned to a catalogue datasheet. When datasheets
based on that catalogue datasheet are created, data can be assigned to that property.
The new property will also be displayed on the Properties tab of the equipment details
windows, enabling data to assigned to that property for a load, supply, protection device etc.
It can also be added to data grids using the List Manager facility (see the Common
Functionality guide for details), and will be available as a DataLink to be assigned to
drawings in the Designer module.

Note: If the user has a Catalogue Datasheet open at the same time as creating a new field,
the new field does not display until the datasheet is closed and then re-opened.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

To display the Property Definitions window, select Setup > Property Definitions from the
Project tab:

Select Equipment from the Object Type list to view equipment properties and Process Data
to view process properties.

3.2.1 Add New Property Definition


To add a property definition, with the appropriate properties list (equipment or process)
open, click New to display the Property Definition window.
For equipment properties:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

For process properties:

Note: These windows can also be accessed from the Datasheet Design window (refer to
Map Database Fields to Datasheet Cells for details).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

New properties can also be created using the Auto Create Properties facility
available from this window (refer to Auto Create Properties for details).

Enter values in the Property Name and Caption fields. The Property Name is mandatory
and a message is displayed if no value is entered into the field.

If no value is entered in the Caption field the value in the Property Name is used.
Select the data type of the property (text, numeric (decimal), numeric (integer) or True/
False) from the Data Type list.
If the property type is process, if the new property has units, check the Has Units checkbox
(not present for equipment property types).
If the property type is equipment, click the button in the Equip Type field (not present for
process property types). The Select Equipment Type window is then displayed:

Select the types of equipment to add the property to by checking the appropriate
checkboxes. Click OK to exit the window. The selected types are then listed in the Equip
Type field.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

If data entered for the new property is to be restricted to the values in a pick list, click the
button in the Pick List field. The Select Picklist window is then displayed:

Select the required picklist by double-clicking on it or clicking on it and clicking Select. The
window then exits and the selected picklist is displayed in the Pick List field.
If a numeric data type was selected in the Data Type field, the minimum and maximum
values that may be entered for the property may be specified in the Minimum Value and
Maximum Value fields.
For any data type except True/False, entries for the property may also be validated against
a regular expression entered in the Regular Expression field.
Click OK to return to the Property Definition window.
When all the required data for the property definition has been entered, click OK to return to
the Property Definitions window, where the new definition will now be listed.
If the property type is process, and if the Has Units checkbox was checked, a property
definition for the units of the new property is automatically created at the same time.
The name of a units property definition will be the name of the new property suffixed with the
units suffix specified in the Please enter a new Units Suffix window (see Preferences - the
default suffix is “Units”). The data type of units property definitions is text. Neither this or the
name may be changed.

3.2.2 Edit Property Definition


To edit an existing Property Definition, select from the list and click Edit. The Property
Definition window will be displayed with the fields populated.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

The Property Name field cannot be edited. All other attributes may be edited. Click Save to
exit the window and save any changes.
Note that the selected equipment types may be changed from the Property Definitions
window by clicking the button that is displayed when the mouse cursor is hovered over a
field in the Equipment Type column. The Select Equipment Type window is then
displayed (see above for details).

3.2.3 Delete Property Definition


To delete a Property Definition, select from the grid list and click Delete. If the property is
currently being used a message will be displayed warning the user that all the references
associated with the property will also be deleted.

Click Yes to continue with the deletion and return to the Property Definitions window. The
deleted Property Definition will be deleted and removed from the grid view.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Click No to cancel the deletion and return to the Property Definitions window.
If the selection has no references associated with it, a message will be displayed asking the
user to confirm the deletion.

Click Yes to confirm the deletion and return to the Property Definitions window. The
deleted property will be removed from the grid view.
Click No to cancel the deletion and return to the Property Definitions window.

3.2.4 Merge Property Definitions


Property Definitions can be merged together by selecting the items to be merged in the grid
view and clicking Merge Properties. The Property Merge window will be displayed.

Complete the Merged Property Name and Merged Property Caption fields. Completing
the Merged Property Name field is mandatory and a message is displayed if no value is
entered into the field.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Click OK to return to the Property Merge window.


If no value is entered for the Merged Property Caption field the value given to the Merged
Property Name is used.
Selected properties may be deleted after the merge and only the merged properties kept. To
delete the selected properties check the Delete existing Properties box.

Note: If the Delete existing Properties box is checked, all references to the deleted
properties will be changed to the new property.

Check one of the radio buttons in the bottom pane to select which one of the existing
properties values will be saved to the newly merged property.

3.2.5 Import Property Definitions


Property Definitions can be imported from another project by clicking Import. The user will
be asked to select a project to import the properties from. If the properties are the same in
both projects, a message is displayed informing the user that there are no properties to
import in the selected project.

Click OK to return to the Property Definitions window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

When differences are found by the import process, the Property Definition Import window
is displayed listing the differences in the grid view.

Select individual properties to import by clicking their relevant checkboxes or choose all the
properties by clicking Select all. Clicking Cancel will return the user back to the Property
Definitions window without merging any properties.
Click Import to start the import process. A progress bar will be displayed followed by the
Import Log window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

The Import Log shows the user the import status and displays the successfully imported
files in the grid view.
Clicking Close closes the Import Log window. The imported definitions will be displayed in
the Property Definitions window.

3.2.6 Preferences
Clicking Preferences displays the Please enter a new Units Suffix window.

Enter a new suffix for the names of automatically generated units property definitions for
process property definitions with units (see Add New Property Definition). Click Save. All
units property definition names are automatically updated to include the new suffix.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

3.3 Project Voltages


The voltages to be used when defining the power supply details of electrical equipment
must be selected from a pre-defined list of project voltages.
For each project voltage, multiple equipment voltages may also be defined, which can be
used to specify the actual minimum voltage required for an item of equipment, e.g. taking
voltage drop from the project voltage into account.
To edit the list of project and equipment voltages, select Setup > Project Voltages from the
Project tab. The Project Voltages window is then displayed:

The window lists those project voltages already set up.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Click on the + symbol next to a project voltage to view any equipment voltages set up for it.
For example:

To add a new project voltage, click New, and from the menu that is then displayed, select
Project Voltage. The Project Voltage Detail window is then displayed:

Enter the volts in the field provided and select the number of phases and the frequency from
the lists of values.
Click Save. The Voltage Detail window is closed and new project voltage is added to the
list in Project Voltages window.
To add a new equipment voltage, select the project voltage it is to be created for, click New,
and from the menu that is then displayed, select Equipment Voltage.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

The Equipment Voltage Detail window is then displayed:

The selected project voltage is displayed at the top of the window. Enter the volts in the field
provided. The number of phases and the frequency of the project voltage are displayed and
cannot be changed.
To edit an existing project or equipment voltage, select it from the list and click Edit. The
Voltage Detail window is then displayed with the details of the selected voltage displayed.
Edit the details as required and click Save.
To delete a voltage, select it from the list and click Delete. A message is then displayed
requesting confirmation of the deletion. Click Yes to continue with the deletion.
If the voltage is being used on the project, a message is displayed saying that the voltage
cannot be deleted.

3.4 Compartment Element Types


In AVEVA Electrical, MCC and Switchboard compartments are populated with compartment
elements such as protection devices, relays, motors etc. AVEVA Electrical is supplied by
default with a number of compartment element types, but users may define additional types
as required.
Compartment element types are placed in groups for ease of selection when defining the
content of compartments and typical compartments.
Compartment element groups and types are defined using the Compartment Element
Groups window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

To access the Compartment Element Groups window select Setup > Compartment
Element Types from the Project tab.

The window lists the existing compartment element groups. Click on the + symbol next to a
group name to view the types within a group. For example:

If the User Defined checkbox for a group or type is checked, this means that the group or
type may be edited or deleted by the user. If it is unchecked this means it is required by
AVEVA Electrical (e.g. for the ETAP interface) and may not be edited or deleted. The setting
of this checkbox cannot be changed by the user.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Use the New button to create new groups and types. Continue at Create Element Groups
and Types.
Use the Edit button to edit groups and types. Continue at Edit Element Groups and Types.
Use the Delete button to delete groups and types. Continue at Delete Element Groups and
Types.
Use the Import From Other Project button to copy element types into the current project
from another AVEVA Electrical project. Continue at Import Element Types from another
Project.

3.4.1 Create Element Groups and Types

Create Element Groups


To create a new group click New. From the menu that is then displayed select Group. The
Compartment Element Type Group Details window is then displayed:

Enter the group name and a description and click OK. The new group is then added to the
list of groups in the Compartment Element Groups window.

Create Element Types


To create a new element type, click on the group that it is to be created in, then click New.
From the menu that is then displayed select Type. The Compartment Element Type
Details window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

The element type group name is displayed at the top of the window.
Enter the name of the type in the Type field.
In the Caption field enter the text that will represent the type elsewhere in the user interface.
Enter a short form, e.g. and abbreviation for the type in the Short Name field.
Click OK. The new type is then added to the list of types in the selected group in the
Compartment Element Groups window.

3.4.2 Edit Element Groups and Types


Note: Only element groups and types that have their User Defined checkbox checked can
be edited.

Edit Element Groups


To edit an element group, select it in the Compartment Element Groups window and click
Edit. The Compartment Element Type Group Details window is then displayed,
populated with details of the selected group:

Edit the details as required and click OK.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Edit Element Types


To edit an element type, select it in the Compartment Element Types window and click
Edit. The Compartment Element Type Details window is then displayed, populated with
details of the selected type:

Edit the details as required and click OK.

3.4.3 Delete Element Groups and Types


Note: Only element groups and types that have their User Defined checkbox checked can
be deleted.
Groups that contain types cannot be deleted. The types must be deleted first.
Types that are in use on the project (e.g. an instance of them has been assigned to a
compartment) cannot be deleted.

To delete an element group or type, select it and click Delete. If a group or type that can be
deleted was selected, the following message is displayed:

Click Yes to complete the deletion.

3.4.4 Import Element Types from another Project


To copy elements types into the current project from another AVEVA Electrical project, click
Import From Other Project. The Select an AVEVA Electrical Project window is then
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Select the project to import from and click Select.


The Equipment Type Import window is then displayed:

The window lists the element types in the source project.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

If an element type is to be imported, check its Select checkbox. Click Select All to check all
the Select checkboxes.
When all required element types have been selected, click Import. The import then takes
place.
Details of the import are then displayed in the Import Log window.

If an element type is already present in the current project, it is updated with the details of
the imported element type. However, if the element type is in use, i.e. an element of this
type has been assigned to a compartment, it cannot be updated in this way.

3.5 Tag Formats


By default, equipment in Electrical Engineer is identified with a simple free-format
equipment number. However, equipment may be identified with tag numbers.
Tag numbers are constructed from various components optionally separated by delimiters.
For example, a tag number may be the concatenation of the relevant plant area number and
its function code, suffixed or prefixed with a number. Any number of different tag number
formats may be created.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Tag formats are selected for each AVEVA Electrical equipment class (refer to Class
Definitions for details) to define how the tag numbers of items within these classes are
formatted.
To view, add or edit tag formats, click Setup > Tag Formats in the Project tab to display the
Tag Formats window.

The window lists the existing tag formats for equipment.

Note: The Free Form tag format (which is the default tag format for equipment) cannot be
edited.

Use the New button to create a new tag format. Continue at Define a New Tag Format.
Use the Edit button to edit an existing tag format. Continue at Edit a Tag Format.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:23 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

3.5.1 Define a New Tag Format


To create a new tag format click New.
The Tag Format window is then displayed:

Enter a project-unique name for the new format in the Tag Format field. Complete the
Description and Remarks fields as required.
The equipment attributes (“tag codes”) that the tag format will consist of, their order and the
delimiters separating them (if any), are defined in the Tag Codes section of the window.

Note: The list of available tag codes can be edited via the Tag Codes button. This must be
done before any tag codes are specified for a tag format (the Tag Codes button is
disabled once a tag code is selected). See Edit the List of Available Tag Codes for
details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:24 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

To add a tag code, click “Click here to assign Tag Code...” in the Tag Code field. A list of tag
codes (i.e. equipment attributes) is then displayed:

Click on the required attribute to select it from the list.


If a delimiter is required between the selected tag code and the next tag code that the tag
format is to consist of, select it from the list in the Delimiter field:

Leave the delimiter field blank if no delimiter (or space) is required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:25 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Repeat the above procedure for each required tag code and delimiter until the tag code has
been constructed as required, for example:

An example tag number in the specified format is displayed above the list of tag codes.
To change the order of a tag code and its following delimiter, select it, and click Up or Down
as appropriate to move the tag code up or down one position in the list of codes.

To delete a tag code and its delimiter, select it and click Remove. A message will be
displayed requesting that the user conform the deletion. Click Yes to continue.
Click Apply to save the new tag format without exiting the window.
Click OK to save the new tag format and exit the window.
Click New to clear all the window of all data.
Click Cancel to exit the window without saving the new tag format.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:26 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

3.5.2 Edit a Tag Format


To edit a tag format, select it and click Edit.
The Tag Format window is then opened with the details of the selected format displayed.
For example:

Edit the details as required.


If the tag numbers of items that have previously been assigned the tag format are to be
updated to reflect the changes to the tag format, check the Update Tags checkbox.
If the changes are only to apply the tag numbers subsequently assigned this tag format,
leave the checkbox unchecked (the default setting).
Click OK or Apply to save the changes.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:27 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

If the Update Tags checkbox was checked, the following warning message is displayed:

Click Yes to continue.

Note: The list of available tag codes can be edited via the Tag Codes button. This must be
done before changes to the tag codes are specified for a tag format (the Tag Codes
button is disabled once a tag code is selected). See Edit the List of Available Tag
Codes for details.

3.5.3 Edit the List of Available Tag Codes


The list of available tag codes can be edited. This must be done before any tag codes are
specified for a new tag format, or any changes to tag codes specified for an existing tag
format (the Tag Codes button is disabled once a tag code is selected).
In the Tag Format window, click Tag Codes. The Select Tag Codes for Equipment
window is then displayed. For example:

The window lists all tag codes. Tag codes currently available when constructing tag formats
have their Select checkboxes checked.
To make further tag codes available, check their Select checkboxes.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:28 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

To make a currently available tag code unavailable, uncheck its Select checkboxes. Note
that this cannot be done for tag codes that have been used to construct a tag format. A
message is displayed to inform the user of this if it is attempted.

Create New Tag Codes


New tag codes can be created. Click New. The Add New Tag Code window is then
displayed:

Enter a unique name in the Field Name field.


In the Caption field enter the text that will be displayed to represent the tag code to users.
From the Datatype list select either Text, Numeric or Integer as required.
Specify the maximum number of characters for the new code in the Length field.
If required, enter an example of a value for the tag code in the Example text field.
Click New to clear all the window of all data.
Click OK or Apply to save the changes. The new code is then added to the list of tag codes
in the Select Tag Codes for Equipment window.

Note: New tag codes automatically have their Select checkboxes checked.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:29 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Edit Tag Codes


To edit an existing tag code, select it and click Edit. The Edit window is then displayed. For
example:

Modify the attributes of the tag code as required, then click OK or Apply. Note that the field
name cannot be edited.

Delete Tag Codes


To delete tag codes, select them and click Delete. Multiple tag codes may be selected for
deletion.
A message will be displayed requesting that the user conform the deletion. Click Yes to
continue.
Note that system tag codes (i.e. those supplied with the product) and those that have
already been used to construct a tag format, cannot be deleted. A message is displayed to
inform the user of this if it is attempted.

3.6 Class Definitions


Classes are used to enable each equipment type to have its own tag formats. Each class is
allocated tag formats. Each equipment type is in turn allocated a class.
For details of to create and edit tag formats, refer to Tag Formats.
For details of how to create and edit equipment types (including how to assign classes),
refer to Equipment Type Catalogue.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:30 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Classes are defined and allocated tag formats using the Class Definitions window,
accessed by clicking Setup > Class Definitions in the Project tab

The window lists the existing class definitions for equipment.


Continue at:
• Create New Classes
• Edit Classes
• Delete Classes
• Export Classes to Excel
• Import Classes from Excel
• Assign Tag Formats to Classes

3.6.1 Create New Classes


Note: Classes can also be added to the project by importing them from an Excel
spreadsheet. Refer to Import Classes from Excel for details.

In the Class Definitions window, click New. The Class Details window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:31 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Enter the required details in the Class Name, Class Description and Remarks fields.
The Class Name and Class Description fields cannot be left blank. The entry in the Class
Name field must be unique for the project (i.e. it cannot be a name that another class
already has).
Click Apply to save the new class without exiting the window.
Click OK to save the new class and exit the window.
Click New to clear all the fields.
Click Cancel to exit the window without saving the new class.

3.6.2 Edit Classes


To edit an existing class, select it from the Class Definitions window and click Edit.
The Class Details window is then opened with the details of the selected class displayed.
For example:

Edit the details of the class as required. The Class Name and Class Description fields
cannot be left blank. The entry in the Class Name field must be unique for the project (i.e. it
cannot be a name that another class already has).
Click Apply to save the changes without exiting the window.
Click OK to save the changes and exit the window.
Click Cancel to exit the window without saving the changes.

3.6.3 Delete Classes


To delete classes, select them from the Class Definitions window and click Edit. Multiple
classes may be selected for deletion.

Note: “System” classes, i.e. those supplied with the product cannot be deleted. Neither can
classes that have been assigned a tag format. A message will be displayed to inform
the user why the selected class cannot be deleted.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:32 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

If classes that can be deleted were selected, the following message is displayed:

Click Yes to complete the deletion.

3.6.4 Export Classes to Excel


To export classes to an Excel spreadsheet, click Export to Excel.
A standard Windows Save file as window is then displayed.

Select the filename, location and format in the usual way, and click Save to complete the
procedure.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:33 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

3.6.5 Import Classes from Excel


To import classes from an Excel spreadsheet, click Import from Excel.
The Select excel workbook to import window is then displayed:

Select the required file, and click Open.


If the selected file consists of more than one sheet, the user will be requested to select the
sheet that data is to be imported from, for example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:34 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

The Import Fields window is then displayed:

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

The Excel Column Name fields display the names of the columns in the spreadsheet. The
AVEVA Electrical Field fields displays the Electrical fields they are mapped to.
To map an Excel Column to an AVEVA Electrical database field, click in the AVEVA
Electrical Field field adjacent to the relevant Excel Column Name field, and select the
required AVEVA Electrical field from a drop-down list. To exclude a field from the import,
click Clear button in the grid against the field to be excluded or select the blank entry from
the mapping drop-down list.

Note: AVEVA Electrical automatically checks each Excel Column Name from the first row
in the Excel worksheet against fields names in AVEVA Electrical Database (if not
found then the field captions - as set in the Grid Manager). If a match is found then
AVEVA Electrical automatically adds the Field Name to the mapping list. The user
can select a different field from the mapping list if required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:35 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Defining a New Mapping Definition


Sets of column-field mappings can be saved and re-used for future imports. Define the
required mappings as described above, then click New. The Mapping Name and
Description fields are then displayed and the New button is replaced by a Save button.

Once the name and description for the mapping have been entered, click Save and the
mappings will be saved and added to the Saved Mappings drop down.

Note: Data can also be imported by just clicking on the Import button. However it may
save time to save the mappings if an import with those mappings is to be performed
again.

AVEVA Electrical displays a window showing all the columns in the Excel Workbook
selected earlier.
Once the mappings have been set up, click Import.
AVEVA Electrical will display the Import Options window from which the user may choose
to import reports one by one or in a batch. The batch option processes all records together
then displays a differences report enabling users to accept or reject each change. The one
by one option displays a differences report for each record one at a time.

Click on the required option. If field mappings are being tested, it is recommended that the
Process each Record and Show Differences one by one option is selected. AVEVA

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:36 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Electrical will then process the data and show any differences in the Import Differences
window:

The Import Differences window shows the differences between AVEVA Electrical data and
proposed (imported Excel) data. If the one by one import option was selected, the difference
for a single record are listed. If the batch option was selected, differences for all records are
displayed.
To accept the changes either select individual field data by clicking the Accept checkbox for
each, or select the Accept All checkbox at the top of this window (all individual records will
be auto-selected).
To save the checked (accepted) data to the project, click Save.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next record, if there is one.
To cancel any import for the current tag record, click Close.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next record, if there is one.

Note: To cancel all further importing click Stop Import.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:37 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

After the import is complete, the Import Log window is displayed:

The Import Log window shows the user the import status and displays the successfully
imported files in the grid view.

3.6.6 Assign Tag Formats to Classes


To assign tag formats to a class, select the class from the Class Definitions window and
click Assign Tag Formats.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:38 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

The Tag Formats window is then displayed:

The window lists all tag formats for equipment.


To assign a tag format to the class, click its Assign checkbox.
A primary tag format must be specified. To do so, check the appropriate Primary checkbox
of an assigned tag format. Doing so automatically unchecks any previously checked
Primary checkbox.
The primary tag format will be the format selected by default when creating equipment
associated with the class. The other assigned formats will also be available for selection if
required.
Click Save to exit the window and save the changes.
Click Close to exit the window without saving any changes.

3.7 Equipment Type Catalogue


An “equipment type” consists of the association of an equipment class (see Class
Definitions) with a type code and an equipment type. A description for the type may be
entered.
When new equipment is created, a class is specified. This in turn determines which tag
formats may be selected for the equipment and if the selected tag format includes the
equipment code (function), which codes/functions may be selected.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:39 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

To open the Equipment Type Catalogue, select Setup > Type Code Catalogue from the
Project tab. The Equipment Type Code Catalogue window is then displayed:

These additional fields are also available in the windows used for creating and editing
equipment types (see below).
Continue at:
• Create New Equipment Types
• Edit Equipment Types
• Delete Equipment Types
• Export the Equipment Type Catalogue to Excel
• Import the Equipment Type Catalogue from Excel

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:40 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

3.7.1 Create New Equipment Types


To add a new equipment type to the catalogue, click New. The Add New Equipment Type
Code window is then displayed:

From the Class Name list select the class of the equipment type. The Class Description
field is automatically completed with the description of the selected class.
Select an equipment type from the Equipment Type list.
In the Type Code field, enter the equipment type code (function). Enter a description of the
type code in the Description field.
The Class Name, Equipment Type and Type Code fields cannot be left blank. The
combination of class, type and type code must be unique, i.e it cannot already been have
assigned to another equipment type.
Click Apply to save the new equipment type without exiting the window.
Click OK to save the new equipment type and exit the window.
Click New to clear all the fields.
Click Cancel to exit the window without saving the new equipment type.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:41 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

3.7.2 Edit Equipment Types


To edit an existing equipment type, select it and click Edit. The Edit window is then
displayed. For example:

Edit the details of the type as required.


The Class Name, Equipment Type and Type Code fields cannot be left blank. The
combination of class, type and type code must be unique, i.e it cannot already been have
assigned to another equipment type.
Click Apply to save the changes without exiting the window.
Click OK to save the changes and exit the window.
Click Cancel to exit the window without saving the changes.

3.7.3 Delete Equipment Types


To delete equipment types, select them and click Delete. Multiple equipment types may be
selected for deletion. The following message will then be displayed:

Click Yes to complete the deletion.

3.7.4 Export the Equipment Type Catalogue to Excel


To export equipment types to an Excel spreadsheet, click Export to Excel.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:42 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

A standard Windows Save file as window is then displayed.

Select the filename, location and format in the usual way, and click Save to complete the
procedure.

3.7.5 Import the Equipment Type Catalogue from Excel


The Equipment Type Catalogue catalogue can be imported from an Excel spreadsheet. It
can also be imported from another AVEVA Electrical project (see below).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:43 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

To import from a spreadsheet, click Import from Excel. The Select excel workbook to
import window is displayed:

Select the required file, and click Open.


If the selected file consists of more than one sheet, the user will be requested to select the
sheet that data is to be imported from, for example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:44 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

The Import Fields window is then displayed:

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

The Excel Column Name fields display the names of the columns in the spreadsheet. The
AVEVA Electrical Field fields displays the Electrical fields they are mapped to.
To map an Excel Column to an AVEVA Electrical database field, click in the AVEVA
Electrical Field field adjacent to the relevant Excel Column Name field, and select the
required AVEVA Electrical field from a drop-down list. To exclude a field from the import,
click Clear button in the grid against the field to be excluded or select the blank entry from
the mapping drop-down list.

Note: AVEVA Electrical automatically checks each Excel Column Name from the first row
in the Excel worksheet against fields names in AVEVA Electrical Database (if not
found then the field captions - as set in the Grid Manager). If a match is found then
AVEVA Electrical automatically adds the Field Name to the mapping list. The user
can select a different field from the mapping list if required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:45 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Defining a New Mapping Definition


Sets of column-field mappings can be saved and re-used for future imports. Define the
required mappings as described above, then click New. The Mapping Name and
Description fields are then displayed and the New button is replaced by a Save button.

Once the name and description for the mapping have been entered, click Save and the
mappings will be saved and added to the Saved Mappings drop down.

Note: Data can also be imported by just clicking on the Import button. However it may
save time to save the mappings if an import with those mappings is to be performed
again.

AVEVA Electrical displays a window showing all the columns in the Excel Workbook
selected earlier.
Once the mappings have been set up, click Import.
AVEVA Electrical will display the Import Options window from which the user may choose
to import reports one by one or in a batch. The batch option processes all records together
then displays a differences report enabling users to accept or reject each change. The one
by one option displays a differences report for each record one at a time.

Click on the required option. If field mappings are being tested, it is recommended that the
Process each Record and Show Differences one by one option is selected. AVEVA

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:46 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Electrical will then process the data and show any differences in the Import Differences
window:

The Import Differences window shows the differences between AVEVA Electrical data and
proposed (imported Excel) data. If the one by one import option was selected, the difference
for a single record are listed. If the batch option was selected, differences for all records are
displayed.
To accept the changes either select individual field data by clicking the Accept checkbox for
each, or select the Accept All checkbox at the top of this window (all individual records will
be auto-selected).
To save the checked (accepted) data to the project, click Save.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next record, if there is one.
To cancel any import for the current tag record, click Close.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next record, if there is one.

Note: To cancel all further importing click Stop Import.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:47 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

After the import is complete, the Import Log window is displayed:

The Import Log window shows the user the import status and displays the successfully
imported files in the grid view.

3.8 Loading Factors


Loading factors may be defined. These may subsequently be used when defining loads.
To add, edit or delete loading factors, select Setup > Loading Factor from the Project tab.
The Loading Factor window is then displayed:

To create a new factor, click New and enter the description and percentage value as
required. Up to four loading factors may be defined.
To delete a factor, select it from the list and click Delete.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:48 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

Note: If a factor is deleted that has been associated with a load or loads, when the Save
button is clicked, a message is displayed warning that all calculations related to the
load(s) will become invalid. Click Yes to continue or No to cancel the deletion.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:49 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Setup

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:50 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

4 Loads List

The Loads list is the main window for adding/editing Loads. All Loads for the project are
shown in the Loads grid. The viewable columns, their captions, column size and order are
user-definable using the Grid Manager utility.

Access the Loads List


To open the Loads list, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the Home tab.
Select Loads under the Lists heading from the list of grids that is then displayed. The
Loads grid is then displayed:

Refer to Working with the Data Grid for information on the grid controls including selecting a
load record, and sorting and filtering the grid data.
To edit data, the user can either double-click on a load record, or select it and click Edit on
the Home tab. The user can also edit most column data directly in the Grid itself by selecting
the cell and entering a new value, selecting a value from a pick list etc. Columns with a
yellow coloured background cannot be edited directly in the grid.
Datasheet No Column
Cells in the Datasheet No of the grid display a button in the right side of the cell when the
mouse cursor is hovered over them. This is used to assign the load to a datasheet or to view
and/or edit a datasheet if one is already assigned. See Assign, View and Edit Datasheets
for more details.

Supply Column
Cells in the Supply column of the grid display a button in the right side of the cell when the
mouse cursor is hovered over them. If a Load has not been allocated a supply, a supply can
be allocated by clicking on this button and selecting one from a list of available supplies. If a
supply has been allocated, this button can be used to select a different supply, or view and

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

edit the existing supply. See Assign Loads to Supplies for further details.

Grid PickLists
Some Loads list grid cells contain pick lists. The value lists in each pick list are generally
loaded from both the PickList library, plus any value that has been entered into the pick list's
field. Therefore manually adding a value into the pick list will add that new value to the
picklist for future use.

Note: A pick list may be set so that grid cells must be completed with the values in it, i.e.
other values may not be manually entered.

Note: Any value manually added directly into a grid pick list does not get added to the
picklist's value list until the Refresh toolbar command is used or the grid is re-loaded
(e.g. Electrical Engineer is re-started).

Refer to Using PickLists for further information on editing pick lists.

Loads List - List Tools Options

The following options are located on the List Tools - Loads tab:

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Actions Section

Create Wiring Used to create wiring between loads and supplies using pre-
defined Wiring Rules. Refer to Create Wiring for a Multiple Loads
for details.

Bulk Update Tag Used to change the tag format of multiple loads. Refer to Edit
Format Tag Formats of Multiple Loads for details.

Calculations Section

Cable Sizing Used to calculate cable sizes for loads. Refer to Calculate Single
Cable Size or Calculate Multiple Cable Sizes for details.

Cable Sizing Check Used to view a report showing the differences between current
and sized cable sizing related values for selected loads. Refer to
Cable Sizing Check Report for details.

Attached Documents Section

Open All Opens a list of the documents attached to the selected loads.
Refer to View Attachments for details.

Attach Document Used to link a selected load to an external document (e.g.


Vendor Data PDF, Calibration Sheet Word Document etc.).
Refer to Attach a Document to a Load for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Reports Section

Cable Sizing Opens the Report Manager, from which a cable sizing report can
Report be generated.

Adding New Tags to the Loads List


For details of how to add a load to the list, refer to Manually Add a Tag to the Loads List.
Loads can also added to the Loads list by copying an existing load (see Copy Loads), by
importing from Excel (see Import Load Data from Excel), from AVEVA P&ID (see AVEVA
P&ID Load Tags Import), from AVEVA Schematics (see AVEVA Schematic Model Load
Tags Import), and from AVEVA Tags (see AVEVA Engineering Load Tags Import).
Loads can also be created from the Equipment List, and when creating/editing a Key Line
Diagram (see Create Content of Key One Line Diagrams).

4.1 Manually Add a Tag to the Loads List


To manually add a new Load tag to a project, with the Loads List open, click New in the
Records section of the Home tab to display the Select Equipment Type window:

Double-click on required equipment type, or click on it and then click Select.


The Equipment Tag window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

This window is used to specify the tag of the new load.


The Class list consists of all classes to which tag formats have been assigned (refer to
Class Definitions for details of classes and tag format allocation). Select the required class.
The Tag Format list is then populated with all the tag formats that have been assigned to
the selected class (the class designated the primary class is automatically pre-selected).
Select the required tag format from this list.
The fields displayed under the Tag Format list will depend on the fields that the selected tag
format consist of (refer to Tag Formats for details).
If the “Free Form” tag format is selected (see above), simply enter the required tag in the
Equipment No field.
If a different tag format is selected, the displayed fields will change to reflect this. For
example:

Note that any delimiters defined for tag format are displayed after the fields they follow.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Complete the fields as required. Note that if the tag format includes “Function”, the list of
available functions (codes) will be restricted to the equipment type codes associated with
the selected class (refer to Equipment Type Catalogue for details).
The entered tag number is displayed at the bottom of the window. For example:

When the required tag data has been entered, click OK.
The Load Detail window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

The Single Line Check Report button is used to run the Single Line Check Report for the
load. The report will display the Single Line Diagram for the supply assigned to the load. It is
disabled until a supply is assigned. See Single Line Check Reports for Loads.

Load Tab
To change the tag number, click the button next to the Tag No field to display the
Equipment Tag window again (see above).
If the selected tag format for the equipment includes “Area”, the Area No field displays the
plant area that the load is in, and cannot be changed. If the tag format does not include the
plant area, select it in this field.
The Area Path: displays the parent area(s) of the selected plant area, if there are any.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Select the rated power of the load in the Rated Power field.
Enter or select the other engineering details of the load (utilisation, voltage, power and
efficiency details etc) as required. Refer to Load Detail Window for further details.
The user can select a loading factor which will be used instead of the calculated value.
To select a different loading factor from the default, click the button next to the Loading
Factor field. The Loading Factors window is then displayed:

Select the required factor from the list (refer to Loading Factors for details of how this list is
set up).
Click Save. The selected factor is then displayed in the Loading Factor field.
From the Load tab, the load may also be assigned to a supply by clicking the Assign button
to open the Assign Supply window, or unassigned by clicking the Un-Assign button. See
Assign Loads to Supplies for details.

Note: Linked loads can be assigned using the Loads Assigned Tab.

If the load is a motor, a motor type can be selected by clicking the button in the Mechanical
Load field. The Select a Motor from Catalogue window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Use this window to select a catalogue motor (see Motor Catalogue) by double-clicking on it
or clicking on it then clicking Select. The Electrical Data fields on the Load tab will then be
completed with the details of the catalogue motor. These may be amended if required.

Note: All the data is copied from the motor catalogue. The system load calculations are
only executed when a load field is subsequently changed.

For more information on the motor catalogue, refer to Motor Catalogue.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Loads Assigned Tab

The Loads Assigned tab is used to link a load to the current load, so that the current load is
effectively the supplier of the linked load.
To assign a load to the current load, click Assign. The Assign Load window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Note: Only a single load can be assigned in this way. If the load already has a load
assigned to it, an error message is displayed.

To select a load, double-click on the required load or click on it and then click Assign.
If, with the addition of the selected load, the sum of the rated power of the loads assigned to
the supply would be greater than the current load’s rated power, a warning message is
displayed, For example:

Click Yes to assign the load anyway or No to cancel.


The selected load is then displayed on the tab:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

To un-assign a load, select it and click the Un-Assign button. A message is displayed
requesting that the un-assignment be confirmed. Click Yes to continue.

Detail Tab

In the Detail tab, enter additional details of the load.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

The tab includes facilities for creating wiring for the load using a selected wiring rule and
assigning an External Cable Sizing template to a load. See Create Wiring and Allocate
Cable Sizing Templates to Equipment for details.
If the load is a motor, the tab includes additional fields for entering motor information:

The lower part of the tab consists of two sub-tabs. The General tab (see above) is used to
enter general project related data.
The Datasheet tab is used to enter order information and to assign the load to a datasheet
or to view and/or edit a datasheet if one is already assigned.

See Assign, View and Edit Datasheets for more details.

4.2 Edit a Tag in the Loads List


To edit an load tag, highlight the tag in the Loads List and click Edit in the Records section
of the Home tab, or double-click on the tag.

Note: Loads can also be edited from the Equipment List.

The Load Detail window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

The window is identical to that used when creating a load (see Manually Add a Tag to the
Loads List), except as described below.
Click New to create a new load instead of editing the current load. The window as it appears
when creating a new load is then displayed.

Last Edit Field


The Last Edit field displays the date and time when the load data was last edited. The user
name of the individual that performed the edit is displayed in a tool-tip when the mouse
cursor is hovered over the field. Click the button in the field to display the Audit Manager,
which will display a list of all the changes to the load data.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Attached Documents Link


This link is used to access the Attached Documents window, which is used to attach
documents to the load and the a list of documents already assigned. See Attachments
(External Documents) for details.
The number next to the link is the number of documents currently attached to the load.

Properties Tab
When a load is opened for editing, an additional Properties tab is displayed:

Use this tab to enter additional equipment and process data properties as required. Click on
the appropriate Select Properties Type option and enter or edit values as required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Property names are setup from the Property Definitions option on the Project tab. Refer to
Property Definitions for details.

4.3 Edit Multiple Loads


A facility is provided to edit the engineering data of multiple loads at once.
The tag formats of multiple loads may also be changed.
Continue at:
• Edit Engineering Data for Multiple Loads
• Edit Tag Formats of Multiple Loads

4.3.1 Edit Engineering Data for Multiple Loads


Multiple load records may be edited.
To edit multiple records, select multiple records in the Loads List, click Edit in the Records
section of the Home tab. The following message is then displayed:

Click Yes. The Multi Field Edit (Bulk Edit) window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Actions required to edit multiple tags:


• Check the Select checkbox for all columns to be edited.
• Enter the new value required in the Value column
(repeat for all columns to be updated).
• Click Save to save the data to all selected tags.
Note: The Copy first record's Data option will copy the data from the first record selected
in the Grid View into the window ready for editing. The data is not actually copied to
the selected tags unless the Select checkbox is selected and the Save button is
clicked.

Note: The columns in this window are the same as the columns in the current Grid view as
defined by the Grid Manager.

4.3.2 Edit Tag Formats of Multiple Loads


The tag formats (see Tag Formats) of multiple loads can be changed in a single bulk edit.
When the tag format of a load is changed, the tag number of the load will be updated to
reflect the new format.
To edit the tag format of multiple loads select the items, then click Bulk Update Tag Format
in the Actions section of the List Tools - Loads tab.
The Load Bulk Update Tag Format window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

The window displays the current tag numbers of the loads selected in the Loads list, with
their class names (see Class Definitions) and tag formats.
The required tag format to be applied to all the listed loads is selected from the Tag Format
list.
By default, this list is restricted to the tag formats assigned to the classes of the listed loads.
If the listed loads are associated with different classes, only those tag formats common to all
those classes are available. Select the required format.
If required, the class of the listed loads can be changed. Uncheck the Lock Class
checkbox.
The Class Name list then becomes available. Select the required class from this list. The
Tag Format list will then list the tag formats associated with the selected class. Select the
required format.
Once the required tag format has been selected, click Next.
The window then lists the loads with the “proposed” tag numbers, i.e. the tag numbers of the
loads with the selected tag format applied.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

The current tag number, and current and proposed classes and tag formats are also
displayed.
Only those loads with their Select checkboxes checked will have their tag numbers
changed. They are checked by default. Uncheck Select checkboxes as required. The
Select All checkbox can be used to uncheck (and re-check) all Select checkboxes.
When the required loads have been selected, click Next.
The following warning message is then displayed, warning that the “new” tag numbers
created by this procedure may duplicate those of other loads.

Click Yes to continue, or No to close the message without continuing.


If Yes is clicked, the changes to the tag numbers then take place.
A log of the changes is then displayed, listing successful and failed changes to tag numbers.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Click Close to exit the window.

4.4 Assign Loads to Supplies


To assign a load to a supply either:
• Click the button that is displayed in the Supply cell of the load in the Loads List when
the mouse cursor is hovered over it, or
• Click the Assign button in the Supplied From section on the Loads tab of the Load
Detail window (see Manually Add a Tag to the Loads List).
Note: Loads can also be assigned to supplies from the Supply Details window. See Loads
Assigned/Windings Tab - General.

Note: A load can be assigned as linked to another load using the Loads Assigned Tab of
the Load Detail window. The linked load is supplied from the load it is linked to.

Note: Loads and their supplies can be designated when creating a Key One Line diagram.
See Create Content of Key One Line Diagrams for details.

Note: The voltage of a load cannot be changed once a supply is allocated. The load must
first be unassigned from the supply.

The Assign Supply window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

All available supplies are listed. If a transformer has more than one winding defined, each
will be listed.
In the case of MCCs and switchboards, select a compartment from the From Compartment
list.
Depending the on the supply type, the From Element/Circuit column will display the default
circuit (for distribution boards) or available compartment element (for MCCs and
switchboards) for each supply (if they have been defined).
If required, a different circuit/element may be selected from a list of values in this field, if
more than one has been defined.
To select a supply, double-click on it, or click on it and click Select.
If the selected supply is a distribution board without any circuits defined for it, the following
message will be displayed.

A circuit must be defined for the distribution board before it can be selected. See Supplies
List.
The selected supply is then displayed in the Supply cell in the Load list and in the Supplied
From section on the Load tab of the Load Detail window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

The load is automatically assigned to the first available spare busbar compartment of an
MCC or switchboard supply. If a spare compartment is not available it is automatically
created.

4.4.1 Change Supply


To change the which supply a load is assigned to, click the button that is displayed in the
Supply cell of the load in the Loads List when the mouse cursor is hovered over it. If a
supply has been assigned to the load, the Options... window is then displayed:

Click Change Supply Assignment. The Assign Supply window is then displayed. Select a
different supply as described in Assign Loads to Supplies.

4.4.2 View/Edit Supply Details


To view and/or edit details of a supply, click the button that is displayed in the Supply cell of
the load in the Loads List when the mouse cursor is hovered over it. The Options... window
(see above) is then displayed.
Click Edit Supply Detail. The Supply Details window is then displayed. See Supplies List
for details.

4.4.3 Unassign Supply


To unassign a load from a supply, either:
• Click the button that is displayed in the Supply cell of the load in the Loads List when
the mouse cursor is hovered over it.
The Options... window is then displayed (see above). Click the Change Supply
Assignment option.
The Assign Supply window is then displayed (see above). Click the Not Assigned
button.
• Click the Un-Assign button in the Supplied From section on the Loads tab of the
Load Detail window (see Manually Add a Tag to the Loads List). A message is
displayed asking that the un-assignment be confirmed. Click Yes to continue.

4.5 Assign, View and Edit Datasheets


There are various methods for assigning a load to a datasheet, and having done so, viewing
and editing the associated datasheet.
Continue at:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

• Assign Loads to Datasheets


• View/Edit Datasheets

4.5.1 Assign Loads to Datasheets


To assign a load to a datasheet either:
• From the Loads List, for loads that have not had datasheets assigned to them, click on
the button in the Datasheet No column cell of a load, displayed when the mouse is
hovered over it.
or,
• Click the button in the Datasheet No field on the Detail - Datasheet tab of the Load
Details window (see Manually Add a Tag to the Loads List). The Add Datasheet for
window is then displayed. See Datasheets for details.
or,
• While creating or editing a datasheet (see Add New Datasheets and Edit Datasheet
Information) assign the load using the facilities of the Tags tab of the Datasheet
Information window.
Note: At least one catalogue datasheet for an equipment type must exist before loads of
that type can be assigned to a datasheet.

4.5.2 View/Edit Datasheets


To view and/or edit the datasheet assigned to a load either:
• From the Loads List, for loads that have had datasheets assigned to them, click on the
button in the Datasheet No column cell of a supply, displayed when the mouse is
hovered over it.
or,
• Click the button in the Datasheet No field on the Detail - Datasheet tab of the Load
Details window (see Manually Add a Tag to the Loads List).
or,
• From the Datasheets List, double-click on the Datasheet record or highlight the record
in the Datasheets list and click Open on the List Tools - Datasheets tab.
The datasheet is then shown by the Datasheets viewer. Refer to Datasheet Data Entry.

4.6 Copy Loads


Engineer supports copying of existing loads to create new tags.
Select the existing tag record in the Loads List and select Copy Selected from the drop-
down menu next to the New option on the Home tab.
AVEVA Electrical will display a new Load Detail window containing all the copied data in the
window.
Change the details as required. Make sure the Equipment No/Tag Number is changed.
Click Save.

4.7 Import Data


Data can be imported into the Loads List from various sources.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Continue at:
• Import Load Data from Excel
• AVEVA P&ID Load Tags Import
• AVEVA Schematic Model Load Tags Import
• AVEVA Engineering Load Tags Import
• AVEVA Diagrams Load Tag Import

4.7.1 Import Load Data from Excel


Users may import load data into the AVEVA Electrical project database from a Microsoft
Excel Workbook.
The Excel Spreadsheet
The Excel spreadsheet must be in a simple tabular format (columns and rows) and the first
row should contain unique column names (headings) so that AVEVA Electrical can identify
the column's data. The column names are user definable but must not be duplicated.
AVEVA Electrical will only import column data that contains a heading.
The Excel file must contain an identity column containing the Equipment Number. It must
also contain Area Number and Equipment Type columns.
Once an Excel spreadsheet is selected for import, users must 'map' each Excel column
name (heading) to an AVEVA Electrical database field using the AVEVA Electrical import
utility. Data can then be imported into AVEVA Electrical. The import utility will check if the
identity column field exists in mappings.
While processing records to be imported, if a record already exists in the database AVEVA
Electrical will show the differences between the imported data and the AVEVA Electrical
data, allowing the user to accept/reject the proposed changes on a record by record (and
field by field) basis. If the record does not exist in AVEVA Electrical and the user accepts the
importation of the record, AVEVA Electrical will create a new record for that drawing or
catalogue item.
The Import Procedure
Open the Loads List. From the Import section of the Manage tab, click From Excel.
The Load Import Wizard window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:23 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Click Browse and select the Excel file from which data is to be imported. Click Next >.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:24 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

The next window shows all the columns in the Excel spreadsheet to be imported. Select an
existing Field Mapping (if one for this Import type exists) from saved mappings drop down
or use the automatic mappings created by AVEVA Electrical and make changes to these
mappings (if required).
Excel Column Name fields display the names of the columns in the spreadsheet. The
AVEVA Electrical Field fields displays the Electrical fields they are mapped to.
To map an Excel Column to an AVEVA Electrical database field, click in the AVEVA
Electrical Field field adjacent to the relevant Excel Column Name field, and select the
required AVEVA Electrical field from a drop-down list.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:25 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

To exclude a field from the import, click Clear button in the grid against the field that needs
to be excluded or select the blank entry from the mapping drop-down list.

Note: AVEVA Electrical automatically checks each Excel Column Name from the first row
in the Excel worksheet against fields names in AVEVA Electrical Database (if not
found then field Captions - as set in the Grid Manager). If a match is found then
AVEVA Electrical automatically adds the Field Name to the mapping list. The user
can select a different field from the mapping list if required.

Defining a New Mapping Definition


Sets of column-field mappings can be saved and re-used for future imports. Define the
required mappings as described above, then select the New command button. The Mapping
Name and Description fields are then displayed and the New button is replaced by a Save
button.

Once the name and description for the mapping have been entered, click Save and the
mappings will be saved and added to the Saved Mappings drop down.

Note: Data can also be imported by just clicking on the Import button. However it may
save time to save the mappings if an import with those mappings is to be performed
again.

Importing the Data


Once the mappings have been set up, click Next >.
A list of loads in the spreadsheet that will not be imported because they are invalid in some
way is then displayed, along with the reason that they are invalid:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:26 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Note: Nameplate Power, Absorbed Power and Loading Factor are fields that can be
calculated as well as mapped. In order to handle any inconsistencies with the
imported data, the fields are given a priority. The order of priority is: Nameplate
Power, Absorbed Power, Loading Factor, with Nameplate Power being the most
significant.
If only Nameplate Power or only Absorbed Power is mapped then Loading Factor is
set to 100%.

Click Next >.


A list of loads which can be imported is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:27 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

To import a load, check its Select checkbox. Check the Select all checkbox to check all the
Select checkboxes.
Click Next >.
AVEVA Electrical will display the Import Options window from which the user may choose
to import reports one by one or in a batch. The batch option processes all records together
then displays a differences report enabling users to accept or reject each change. The one
by one option displays a differences report for each record one at a time.

Click on the required option. If field mappings are being tested, it is recommended that the
Process each Record and Show Differences one by one option is selected. AVEVA
Electrical will then process the data and show any differences in the Import Differences
window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:28 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

The Import Differences window shows the differences between AVEVA Electrical data and
proposed (imported Excel) data. If the one by one option was selected, the difference for a
single record are listed. If the batch option was selected, differences for all records are
displayed.
To accept the changes either, select individual field data by clicking the Accept checkbox for
each.
Or select the Accept All checkbox at the top of this window (all individual records will be
auto-selected).
To save the checked (accepted) data to the catalogue click Save.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next record, if there is one.
To cancel any import for the current tag record, click Close.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next record, if there is one.

Note: To cancel all further importing click Stop Import.

After the differences have been displayed, the selected list of valid loads is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:29 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Click Import to proceed with the import. The import then takes place. After the import is
complete, a log of the imported loads is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:30 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Click Close the exit the import wizard.

4.7.2 AVEVA P&ID Load Tags Import


Engineer includes facilities to import tag data into the Loads List from the AVEVA P&ID.

AVEVA P&ID Tag Data Import Configuration


Before the user can import data from AVEVA P&ID, mappings between AVEVA P&ID and
AVEVA Electrical fields must be setup.
Click Setup > AVEVA P&ID Import on the Project tab to display the AVEVA P&ID Data
Import Configuration window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:31 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import. This functionality is only available
for SQL database projects.

Both the AVEVA P&ID and the AVEVA Electrical mapping fields will be empty until the user
selects a project file. To select a project file, click the browse button to the right of the
AVEVA P&ID Project file text field. A browser window will open allowing the user to
navigate to the required project file. After the project file is selected the AVEVA P&ID Data
Import Configuration window will refresh to display the default mapping.
If the user changes the AVEVA P&ID Project file setting, a warning message window will
be displayed informing the user that changing project files may corrupt the data.
Click Yes to accept the change of project or No to cancel.
The Elements Types field on the AVEVA P&ID Data Import Configuration window
enables the user to filter the data displayed in the grid view between Loads and Supplies
by selecting from the drop-down menu. The mapping data for Loads is imported into the
Loads List. The mapping data for Supplies is imported into the Supplies List.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:32 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

To map a field click on the drop-down list in the AVEVA Electrical Field column and select a
value from the list.
Some of the fields in the AVEVA Electrical Field column are mandatory. If any of these
fields are not populated with a value and the user clicks Save, the user will prompted with a
message asking them to configure the mandatory field.
The user must click OK to return to the AVEVA P&ID Data Import Configuration window
and configure the mandatory field(s).
To save the changes made to the mapping fields click Save. To cancel the changes made to
the mapping fields click Cancel.
If the AVEVA P&ID Project is changed after data has been loaded, the Schematic Model
item unique id's stored in AVEVA Electrical will potentially be invalid. An additional
checkbox, Remove all the links for items previously imported from this project is
displayed on the AVEVA P&ID Data Import Configuration window.
Checking this checkbox removes all the unique id's allowing a subsequent import to correct
the tag list in line with the new project.
Import Tags from AVEVA P&ID
To import tags from AVEVA P&ID, select AVEVA P&ID Import from the Integration section
of the Manage tab to display the Import from AVEVA P&ID window.
The Import from AVEVA P&ID window displays totals of new and existing tags with the
option to import all the tags in a batch or one at a time.
The batch option processes all records together then displays a differences report enabling
users to accept or reject each change. The one by one option displays a differences report
for each record one at a time.
If that are any tags previously imported from AVEVA P&ID that have since been deleted in
AVEVA P&ID, the total of these is also displayed, and the Process deleted tags button
becomes active. Click Process deleted tags if these tags are also to be deleted from
Instrumentation.
The Import Differences window shows the differences between AVEVA Electrical data and
proposed (imported AVEVA P&ID) data. If the one by one import option was selected, the
differences for a single record are listed.
If the batch option was selected, differences for all records are displayed.
To accept the changes either select individual field data by clicking the Accept checkbox for
each, or select the Accept All checkbox at the top of this window (all individual records will
be auto-selected).
To save the checked (accepted) data to the project, click Save.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next record, if there is one.
To cancel any import for the current tag record, click Close.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next record, if there is one.
To cancel all further importing click Stop Import
The Import Log then shows the user the import status and displays the successfully
imported files in the grid view.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:33 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

4.7.3 AVEVA Schematic Model Load Tags Import


Engineer includes facilities to import tag data into the Loads List from the AVEVA Schematic
Model.

AVEVA Schematic Model Import Configuration


Before the user can import data from AVEVA Schematic Model, mapping between AVEVA
Schematic Model and AVEVA Electrical fields must be setup.
Click Setup > AVEVA Diagrams Import Configuration > AVEVA Schematic Model
Import Configuration on the Project tab. The AVEVA Schematic Model Data Import
window is then displayed:

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:34 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

The AVEVA Schematic Model Version field enables the user to chose which version of the
software to import from by selecting from a drop-down menu which list all the software
versions currently installed on the user's workstation.
The mapping fields will be empty until the user logs onto a Schematic database. Click the
browse button to the right of the AVEVA Schematic Model Version field. To connect to
Select Login to display the AVEVA Schematic Model Login window.

Complete the Project, Username, Password and Project MBD as appropriate and click
OK.
The Elements Types field allows the user to filter the data displayed in the grid view by
selecting an option from the drop-down menu.
The Elements Types field enables the user to filter the data displayed in the grid view
between Loads and Supplies by selecting from the drop-down menu. The mapping data for
Loads is imported into the Loads List. The mapping data for Supplies is imported into the
Supplies List.
To map a field, click on the drop-down list in the AVEVA Electrical Field column and select
a value from the list.
Some of the fields in the AVEVA Electrical Field column are mandatory. If any of these
fields are not populated with a value and the user clicks Save, the user will prompted with a
message asking them to configure the mandatory field.
The user must click OK to return to the AVEVA Schematic Model Data Import
Configuration window and configure the mandatory field(s).
To save the changes made to the mapping fields click Save. To cancel the changes made to
the mapping fields click Cancel.

Import Tags from AVEVA Schematic Model


To import tags from AVEVA Schematic Model, select AVEVA Diagrams Import > AVEVA
Schematic Model Import from the Integration section of the Manage tab display the
AVEVA Schematic Model Login window.
If data has previously been imported into the project from AVEVA P&ID, a message is
displayed warning the user that because of this no data can be import from AVEVA
Schematic Model.
Clicking OK will terminate the process.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:35 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

If no data has previously been imported into the project, a message is displayed warning the
user that, after importing data from AVEVA Schematic Model the user will be prevented from
importing data from AVEVA P&ID.
If the user clicks No a message window is displayed informing the user that the import has
been terminated.
Click OK to return to the Loads grid view.
If the user clicks Yes the AVEVA Schematic Model Login window is displayed.

Complete the Project, Username, Password and Project MBD as appropriate and click
OK.

Note: If the field mappings have not been set, the AVEVA Schematic Model Data Import
Configuration window is displayed. Refer to AVEVA Schematic Model Import
Configuration for further information. If the user clicks Cancel, a message window is
displayed informing the user that the import cannot continue without the Field
mappings being set.

If field mappings have been setup, the Import from AVEVA Schematic Model window is
displayed:
The Import from AVEVA Schematic Model window displays totals of new and existing
tags with the option to import all the tags in a batch or one at a time.
The batch option processes all records together then displays a differences report enabling
users to accept or reject each change. The one by one option displays a differences report
for each record one at a time.
If that are any tags previously imported from AVEVA Schematic Model that have since been
deleted in AVEVA Schematic Model, the total of these is also displayed, and the Process
deleted tags button becomes active. Click Process deleted tags if these tags are also to
be deleted from Electrical
The Import Differences window shows the differences between AVEVA Electrical data and
proposed (imported AVEVA Schematic Model) data. If the one by one import option was
selected, the differences for a single record are listed.
If the batch option was selected, differences for all records are displayed.
To accept the changes either select individual field data by clicking the Accept checkbox for
each, or select the Accept All checkbox at the top of this window (all individual records will
be auto-selected).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:36 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

To save the checked (accepted) data to the project, click Save.


If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next record, if there is one.
To cancel any import for the current tag record, click Close.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next record, if there is one.
To cancel all further importing click Stop Import
The Import Log then shows the user the import status and displays the successfully
imported files in the grid view.

4.7.4 AVEVA Engineering Load Tags Import


Engineer includes facilities to import tag data into the Loads List from the AVEVA
Engineering.

AVEVA Engineering Import Configuration


Before the user can import data from AVEVA Engineering, mappings between AVEVA
Engineering elements in a selected Engineering project and AVEVA Electrical elements
must be set up.
Click Setup > AVEVA Engineering Integration Configuration on the Project tab to
display the AVEVA Engineering Data Import Configuration window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:37 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Setup the required mappings. The procedure is similar to that described in AVEVA
Schematic Model Import Configuration.

Import Tags from AVEVA Engineering


To import tags from AVEVA Engineering, select AVEVA Engineering Import from the
Integration section of the Manage tab display the AVEVA Engineering Login window.
The procedure is similar to that for importing from AVEVA Schematic Model. Refer to Import
Tags from AVEVA Schematic Model for details.

4.7.5 AVEVA Diagrams Load Tag Import


Engineer includes facilities to import tag data into the Loads List from the AVEVA Diagrams.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:38 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

AVEVA Diagrams Import Configuration


Before the user can import data from AVEVA Diagrams, mappings between AVEVA
Diagrams elements in a selected Diagrams project and AVEVA Electrical elements must be
set up.
Click Setup > AVEVA Diagrams Integration Configuration on the Project tab to display
the AVEVA Diagrams Import Configuration window.

Setup the required mappings. The procedure is similar to that described in AVEVA
Schematic Model Import Configuration.

Import Tags from AVEVA Diagrams


To import tags from AVEVA Diagrams, select AVEVA Diagrams Import > AVEVA
Diagrams Tags Import from the Integration section of the Manage tab.
The procedure is similar to that for importing from AVEVA Schematic Model. Refer to Import
Tags from AVEVA Schematic Model for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:39 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

4.8 Create Wiring


Electrical Engineer can auto create the wiring between loads and supplies using pre-defined
Wiring Rules. Using Wiring Rules, the cables, terminals, cores, wire numbers and cable
core terminations at both the load and supply ends can be generated.

Note: A PC must have a license for the Wiring Manager module for this feature to be
available in Engineer.

Wiring Rules are created and maintained using the Wiring Manager module (see the Wiring
Manager documentation for details).
Continue at:
• Assign Wiring Rules
• Create Wiring for a Single Load
• Create Wiring for a Multiple Loads

4.8.1 Assign Wiring Rules


Open the Load Detail window for the load and access the Detail tab.

Click the button in the Wiring Rule field. The Wiring Rule List window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:40 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

The window lists all the Wiring Rules set up in Wiring Manager. To view a graphical
representation of the rule, click on its name in the list.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:41 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

To select a rule, double-click on it. The Wiring Rule List window then closes and the
selected rule name is displayed in the Wiring Rule field in the Load Detail window.

4.8.2 Create Wiring for a Single Load


To create wiring based on the selected Wiring Rule (see Assign Wiring Rules) between a
load and its supply, open the Load Detail window for the load and access the Detail tab.
Click the Create Wiring button. If no supply has been assigned, the following message will
be displayed:

Refer to Assign Loads to Supplies for how to accomplish this.


If a supply has been assigned, the wiring will then be created and the following message is
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:42 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

4.8.3 Create Wiring for a Multiple Loads


Before proceeding, for all loads for which wiring is to be created:
• assign supplies (see Assign Loads to Supplies), and
• assign wiring rules (see Assign Wiring Rules)
In the Loads List, select the loads for which wiring is to be created.
Click Create Wiring in the Actions section of the List Tools - Loads tab. The Create
Electrical Wiring window is then displayed.

All the selected loads are listed. If a wiring rule has not been assigned to a load, this is
indicated in the Result column. Also, the checkbox in the Select column will be unchecked
for such loads.
To continue, click Create. Wiring is then created for each load for which a rule has been
assigned, except for those loads with no supply assigned, as indicated in the Result
column:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:43 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

4.9 Single Line Check Reports for Loads


The Single Line Check Report facility is used to view the Single Line Diagram on which a
load is located, i.e. the SLD for the supply assigned to the load.
To open the Single Line Check Report for a load, open the Load Detail window for the load.
Click the Single Line Check Report button. This button is disabled unless a supply has
been assigned.
The report is then displayed in a new window with the load tag as its title:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:44 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

The report is automatically generated using the default distribution diagram symbols defined
for the project (see Add and Edit Distribution Diagram Project Symbols).
Click Save Layout to save the SLD to the Distribution Diagrams list. The diagram is saved
with the load tag as its document number.
Refer to View/Edit Distribution Diagrams for further details, including information on how to
edit diagrams.

4.10 Attachments (External Documents)


Engineer includes facilities to attach external documents/files to load tags and for the
viewing of these attached documents.
Attachments can include any Windows supported file. Attached documents might contain
information such as: vendor data, catalogue data, calibration certificates, hazardous area
certificates, site photographs, CAD files etc.
While AVEVA Electrical supports the attachment of any Windows file format, to view an
attached document however the user's workstation must provide access to the an
application to open the attachment's file format (e.g. a PDF viewer to open PDF files).
Continue at:
• View Attachments
• Attach a Document to a Load
• Edit Attached Document Details
• Delete Attached Document

4.10.1 View Attachments


To view the list of the attached documents for an item of equipment, select the equipment,
then click Open All in the Attached Documents section of the List Tools tab to display the
Attached Documents window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:45 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Note: The Attached Documents window can also be viewed when editing a tag by clicking
the Attached Documents link on the Load Detail window.

To view the attached document assigned to a tag, highlight the tag and click Open.

4.10.2 Attach a Document to a Load


To attach a new document to a load tag, either click New on the Attached Documents
window, or select the tag from the Loads list and click Attached Document in the Attached
Documents section of the List Tools tab to display the Attached Documents window.
The Attached Document Details window is displayed.

The file to be attached is selected by clicking the button to the right of the Document field. A
file browser window is opened allowing the user to navigate to the file. Select the required
file and click Open on the file browser window to close the file browser window and return to
the Attached Document Details window with the Document field populated.
The user can select a document type from the Type drop-down list or manually enter a new
type. An optional description can be entered in the Description text box.
By checking the Public checkbox the user can share the attachment with all the users on
the same project. Leaving the Public box un-checked will set the attachment to private and
only the originator will have access to the attachment.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:46 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

Click OK to close the Attached Document Details window and return to the Attach
Documents window with the new attachment displayed in the grid. Click Apply to save the
details of the attachment without exiting the window. Click Cancel to return to the original
Attached Documents window.

4.10.3 Edit Attached Document Details


To edit an attachment assigned to a tag, highlight the tag in the grid and select Edit to
display the Attached Document Details window.

Edit the attachment details as required, as described in Attach a Document to a Load.

4.10.4 Delete Attached Document


To delete an attached document, highlight the tag in the Attached Documents window and
click Delete.

Note: Only the association to the attached document is deleted. Neither the tag or the
actual document file is deleted.

4.11 Instrument Loads


If the project is shared with AVEVA Instrumentation, details of instruments identified as
having power requirements in AVEVA Instrumentation Engineer can be viewed.
To open the Instrument Loads List, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the
Home tab.
Select Instrument Loads under the Lists heading from the list of grids that is then
displayed. The Instrument Loads grid is then displayed:

All data is the grid is display-only. It cannot be edited, deleted or added to.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:47 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Loads List

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:48 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

5 Supplies List

The Supplies List is the main window for adding/editing Supplies. All Supplies for the
project are shown in the Supplies grid. The viewable columns, their captions, column size
and order are user definable using the Grid Manager utility.

Access the Supplies List


To open the Supplies List, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the Home
tab.
Select Supplies under the Lists heading from the list of grids that is then displayed. The
Supplies grid is then displayed:

Refer to Working with the Data Grid for information on the grid controls including selecting a
supply record, and sorting and filtering the grid data.
To edit data the user can either double-click on a supply record, or select it and click Edit on
the Home tab. The user can also edit most column data directly in the grid itself by selecting
the cell and entering a new value, selecting a value from a Pick list etc. Columns with a
yellow coloured background cannot be edited directly in the grid.
Datasheet No Column
Cells in the Datasheet No of the grid display a button in the right side of the cell when the
mouse cursor is hovered over them. This is used to assign the supply to a datasheet or to
view and/or edit a datasheet if one is already assigned. See Assign, View and Edit
Datasheets for more details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Grid PickLists
Some Supplies list grid cells contain pick lists. The value lists in each pick list are generally
loaded from both the PickList library, plus any value that has been entered into the pick list's
field. Therefore manually adding a value into the pick list will add that new value to the
picklist for future use.

Note: A pick list may be set so that grid cells must be completed with the values in it, i.e.
other values may not be manually entered.

Note: Any value manually added directly into a grid pick list does not get added to the
picklist's value list until the Refresh toolbar command is used or the grid is re-loaded
(e.g. Electrical Engineer is re-started).

Refer to Using PickLists for further information on editing pick lists.

Supplies List - List Tools Options

The following options are located on the List Tools - Supplies tab:

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Attached Documents Section

Open All Opens a list of the documents attached to the selected supplies.
Refer to Attachments (External Documents) for details.

Attach Document Used to link a selected supply to an external document (e.g.


Vendor Data PDF, Calibration Sheet Word Document etc.).
Refer to Attachments (External Documents) for details.

Bulk Update Tag Used to change the tag format of multiple supplies. This facility is
Format the same as the one provided for editing multiple loads. Refer to
Edit Tag Formats of Multiple Loads for details.

Reports Section

Load Schedule Opens the Report Manager, from which a load schedule report
can be generated.

Distribution Board Opens the Report Manager, from which a distribution board
Schedule schedule report can be generated.

Adding New Tags to the Supplies List


For details of how to add a supply to the list, refer to Manually Add a Tag to the Supplies
List.
Supplies can also added to the supplies list by copying an existing supply (see Copy
Supplies), by importing from Excel (see Import Supply Data from Excel), from AVEVA P&ID
(see AVEVA P&ID Supply Tags Import), from AVEVA Schematics (see AVEVA Schematic

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Model Supply Tags Import), and from AVEVA Tags (see AVEVA Tags Supply Tags Import).
Supplies can also be created from the Equipment List, and when creating/editing a Key Line
Diagram (see Create Content of Key One Line Diagrams).

5.1 Manually Add a Tag to the Supplies List


To manually add a new Supply tag to a project, with the Supplies List open click New in the
Records section of the Home tab to display the Select Equipment Type window:

Double-click on the required equipment type, or click on it and then click Select.
The Equipment Tag window is then displayed:

This window is used to specify the tag of the new supply.


The Class list consists of all classes to which tag formats have been assigned (refer to
Class Definitions for details of classes and tag format allocation). Select the required class.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

The Tag Format list is then populated with all the tag formats that have been assigned to
the selected class (the class designated the primary class is automatically pre-selected).
Select the required tag format from this list.
The fields displayed under the Tag Format list will depend on the fields that the selected tag
format consist of (refer to Tag Formats for details).
If the “Free Form” tag format is selected (see above), simply enter the required tag in the
Equipment No field.
If a different tag format is selected, the displayed fields will change to reflect this. For
example:

Note that any delimiters defined for tag format are displayed after the fields they follow.
Complete the fields as required. Note that if the tag format includes “Function”, the list of
available functions (codes) will be restricted to the equipment type codes associated with
the selected class (refer to Equipment Type Catalogue for details).
The entered tag number is displayed at the bottom of the window. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

When the required tag data has been entered, click OK.
The Supply Details window is then displayed (or the Transformer Details window if that
type of supply was selected):

The Single Line Check Report button is used to run the Single Line Check Report for the
supply. See Single Line Check Reports for Supplies.
For details of the tabs, which vary depending on the type of supply, continue at:
• General Tab
• Loads Assigned/Windings Tab - General
• Loads Assigned Tab - MCCs and Switchboards
• Loads Assigned Tab - Distribution Boards
• Winding Tab - Transformers
• Loads Assigned Tab - Junction Boxes, UPSs, Generators, Miscellaneous Supplies,
Variable Speed Drives and Sources

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

• Detail Tab
• Compartments Tab - MCCs and Switchboards

5.1.1 General Tab


To change the tag number, click the button next to the Tag No field to display the
Equipment Tag window again (see Manually Add a Tag to the Supplies List).
If the selected tag format for the equipment includes “Area”, the Area No field displays the
plant area that the supply is in, and cannot be changed. If the tag format does not include
the plant area, select it in this field.
The Area Path: displays the parent area(s) of the selected plant area, if there are any.
Enter the load of the supply in the Load field.
Enter or select the other engineering details of the supply as required. Refer to Supply
Detail Window for details of the fields in the Load Summary section of the tab.

Assign Supplies
If the supply is of an equipment type which can itself be supplied (i.e. an MCC, Junction
Box, Distribution Board, Transformer, Switchboard, UPS, Miscellaneous Supply or Variable
Speed Drive), the tab includes additional facilities for displaying the supply:

For an MCC, Distribution Board or Switchboard, supplies are assigned to each incomer
using the Details tab of the Loads Assigned/Winding tab of the supply. See Loads
Assigned Tab - MCCs and Switchboards and Loads Assigned Tab - Distribution Boards.
For a Transformer, UPS, Miscellaneous Supply or Variable Speed Drive, to assign a supply,
click the Assign button (the supply must be saved first).

If a supply or supplies have already been assigned, a message is displayed requesting


confirmation that additional supplies are to be assigned. Click Yes to continue.

Note: Loads and their supplies can be designated when creating a Key One Line diagram.
See Create Content of Key One Line Diagrams for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Note: The voltage of a supply cannot be changed once a supply is allocated to it. The
supply must first be unassigned from the supply.

The Assign Supply window is then displayed:

All available supplies are listed. If a transformer has more than one winding defined, each
will be listed.
In the case of MCCs and switchboards, select a compartment from the From Compartment
list.
Depending the on the supply type, the From Element/Circuit column will display the default
circuit (for distribution boards) or available compartment element (for MCCs and
switchboards) for each supply (if they have been defined).
If required, a different circuit/element may be selected from a list of values in this field, if
more than one has been defined.
To select a supply, double-click on it, or click on it and click Select. If required, multiple
supplies may be selected from the list.
If the selected supply is a distribution board without any circuits defined for it, the following
message will be displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

A circuit must be defined for the distribution board before it can be selected (see Loads
Assigned Tab - Distribution Boards).
The selected supply is then displayed in the Supplied From section on the General tab.
To assign additional supplies, click the Assign button again and proceed as described
above.
The (current) fed item is automatically assigned to the first available spare busbar
compartment of an MCC or switchboard supply. If a spare compartment is not available it is
automatically created.

Un-Assign Supplies
For a Junction Box, Transformer, UPS, Miscellaneous Supply or Variable Speed Drive, to
unassign a supply or supplies from a supply, select them in the Supplied From section on
the General tab and click Un-Assign. A message is displayed asking that the un-
assignment be confirmed. Click Yes to continue.
For an MCC, Distribution Board or Switchboard, supplies are unassigned from incomers
using the Details tab of the Loads Assigned/Winding tab of the supply. See Loads
Assigned Tab - MCCs and Switchboards and Loads Assigned Tab - Distribution Boards.

5.1.2 Loads Assigned/Windings Tab - General


The Loads Assigned tab (called Windings for Transformers) is used to assign loads to the
supply and also to add details of busbars, windings, spares, circuits etc.

Note: Loads can also be assigned to supplies using Loads list facilities. See Assign Loads
to Supplies.

Note: Loads and their supplies can be designated when creating a Key One Line diagram.
See Create Content of Key One Line Diagrams for details.

Note: The voltage of a supply cannot be changed once a load is allocated or a protection
device or incomer is added to it. Any loads must first be unassigned and protection
devices and incomers deleted.

The appearance of the tab and the procedure carried out to assign loads using it depends
on the equipment type of the supply. Continue at:
• Loads Assigned Tab - MCCs and Switchboards
• Loads Assigned Tab - Distribution Boards
• Winding Tab - Transformers
• Loads Assigned Tab - Junction Boxes, UPSs, Generators, Miscellaneous Supplies,
Variable Speed Drives and Sources
Note: The supply must be saved before a load can be assigned.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

5.1.3 Loads Assigned Tab - MCCs and Switchboards

The tab includes a sub-tab for each busbar of the MCC or distribution board.
Refer to Supply Detail Window for details of the fields in the Maximum Demand and
Diversity sections of the tab.

By default, new equipment has a single busbar. If another busbar is required, click the
button (use the button to remove a selected busbar - if there is only one busbar it cannot
be removed). Another sub-tab is added to the tab. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

By default, each busbar is assigned a name automatically, e.g. Busbar 2, Busbar 3 etc.
Couplers to link the busbars are created using the Details tab of the busbars (see below).
If required, change the Diversity Factor values from their default settings.
Each busbar tab includes four further sub-tabs, Loads, Details, Output Voltages and
Properties.

Loads Tab

This tab is used allocate loads to a busbar.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

The tab shows those busbar compartments with loads assigned. Busbar compartments
without a load assigned are not displayed, nor are compartments for connectors from
supplying items. All compartments can be viewed on the Compartments tab (see
Compartments Tab - MCCs and Switchboards).
A load is automatically assigned to the first available spare busbar compartment. If a spare
compartment is not available it is automatically created for the load. The loads will be
assigned to a default “Connector” element created with the automatically generated
compartments. This can subsequently be replaced in the Compartments tab.
To assign loads to the busbar:
1. Click the Assign button. The Assign Load window is displayed:

2. To select the load or loads, first select one of the busbar’s output voltages from the
Output Voltage list. The output voltages for a busbar are viewed and specified using
the Output Voltages Tab.
3. The loads that match the selected output voltage are then listed (including supplies that
may be loads). Check the checkboxes in the Select column for the loads to be
assigned, then click Assign.
4. If, with the addition of the selected loads, the sum of the rated power of the loads
assigned to the supply would be greater than the supplies rated power, a warning
message is displayed. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

5. Click Yes to assign the load anyway or No to cancel.


6. The loads are then assigned to the busbar. The loads are assigned to the first available
spare compartments of the busbar.
If there are no or not enough spare compartments, the required compartment or
compartments will be automatically generated for the protection devices associated
with the loads. The loads will be assigned to a default “Connector” element created
with the automatically generated compartments. This can subsequently be replaced in
the Compartments Tab - MCCs and Switchboards.
Compartments are created with default values. These may subsequently be edited by
double-clicking on the compartment/load row in the Loads tab. This opens the
Compartments tab with the compartment selected. From the Compartments tab, editing
facilities are available. Refer to Compartments Tab - MCCs and Switchboards for details.
To un-assign a load from a compartment or compartments, select the compartment or
compartments in the Loads tab and click the Un-Assign button. A message is displayed
requesting that the un-assignment be confirmed. Click Yes to continue.
To move a compartment to a different busbar, right-click on it. A list of the other busbars of
the supply is then displayed. For example:

Click on the required busbar to complete the re-assignment.


To access details of a compartment on the Compartments tab, double-click on it. The
Compartments tab is then displayed with the node of the selected compartment expanded.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Details Tab

The Details tab is used to view and edit additional details of a busbar, specifically its name,
description, Rated Voltage (cannot be edited), Rated Load, Rated Current and Fault
Current.
Busbar incomer protection devices may also be added and edited using this tab, and details
of any couplers may be viewed.
Incomer protection devices are added by assigning a supply to the busbar. As part of this
procedure a compartment. and a protection device within that compartment are selected. If
no unused compartment is available, they will be automatically generated.
To assign a supply:
1. Click the Assign button. The Assign Supply window is then displayed:

All available supplies are listed. If a transformer has more than one winding defined,
each will be listed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Depending on the supply type, the Circuit column will display the default circuit (for
distribution boards) or spare (for MCCs and switchboards) for each supply (if they have
been defined).
If required, a different circuit/spare may be selected from a list of values in this field, if
more than one has been defined.
2. To select a supply, double-click on it, or click on it and click Select. If required, multiple
supplies may be selected from the list.
If the selected supply is a distribution board without any circuits defined for it, the
following message will be displayed.

A circuit must be defined for the distribution board before it can be selected (see Loads
Assigned Tab - Distribution Boards).
3. If more than one unused compartment is available, select it from the Compartment list.
If there is only one compartment available, this will be the only one listed.
4. If the selected compartment has more than one element available, select it from the To
Element list. If the compartment has only a single element available, this will be
selected automatically.
If there are no compartments available (a compartment must have an “unused”
element in order to be treated as available), none will be listed. A compartment will
automatically be generated for the protection device associated with the supply. The
supply will be assigned to a default “Connector” element created with the automatically
generated compartment. This can subsequently be replaced in the Compartments Tab
- MCCs and Switchboards.
5. Click Assign. The selected supply is then displayed in the From field for the incomer.
To select a different supply for the incomer, or to unassign the current supply, click the
button in the From field. The Assign Supply window is then displayed. As required, either
select a different supply as described above, or click the Not Assigned button to unassign
the supply.
The Ext. CS Template field is used to assign an External Cable Sizing template to an
incomer. See Allocate Cable Sizing Templates to Equipment for details.
To unassign a supply, click Unassign. A message will then be displayed requesting that the
un-assignment be confirmed. Click Yes to continue.
To access details of a compartment on the Compartments tab, double-click on it. The
Compartments tab is then displayed with the node of the selected compartment expanded.
Refer to Compartments Tab - MCCs and Switchboards for details.
Couplers linking the busbars of an MCC or Switchboard are created in the Coupler section
of the Details tab.
To create a coupler or couplers linking the busbars of the MCC or Switchboard, click
Couple. The Assign Load window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Select one of the busbar’s output voltages from the Output Voltage list. The output voltages
for a busbar are viewed and specified using the Output Voltages Tab.
The window then lists the busbars with matching voltages. To create couplers linking these
busbars, click their Select checkboxes, then click Assign.
The busbars connected via the couplers are then assigned as loads are then assigned to
current the busbar. They are assigned to the first available spare compartments of the
busbar.
If there are no or not enough spare compartments, the required compartment or
compartments will be automatically generated. The couplers will be assigned to a default
“Connector” element created with the automatically generated compartments. This can
subsequently be replaced in the Compartments Tab - MCCs and Switchboards.
The coupler compartments are then listed in the Coupler section:

To “decouple” a busbar from the current busbar, select the coupler compartment from the
above list, and click Decouple.
A message is then displayed requesting that the user confirm that this is required. Click Yes
to continue.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Output Voltages Tab

Loads fed by MCC and Switchboard busbars must have a voltage matching one of the
supply output voltages listed on this tab. The default output voltages are displayed above.
To add another voltage to the busbar, click Add. The Select Voltage window is displayed:

The window lists the pre-defined list of project voltages (refer to Project Voltages for details).
Click on the required voltage and click OK to add it to the list in the Output Voltages tab.
To remove an output voltage, select it in the tab and click Remove. A message will then be
displayed requesting that the deletion be confirmed. Click Yes to continue.
If the voltage is the only one listed in the tab, it cannot be deleted. (the busbar must have at
least one output voltage). A message will be displayed to inform the user of this and the
deletion will be cancelled.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

A supply voltage cannot be deleted either if it is in use by a fed item. A message will be
displayed to inform the user of this and the deletion will be cancelled.

Properties Tab

In the Properties tab, enter additional busbar properties as required.


Property names are setup from the Property Definitions option on the Project tab. Refer to
Property Definitions for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

5.1.4 Loads Assigned Tab - Distribution Boards

The Loads Assigned tab displays details of the Distribution Board’s busbar. If required,
change the Diversity Factor values from their default settings.
Refer to Supply Detail Window for details of the fields in the Maximum Demand and
Diversity sections of the tab.
The tab includes four further sub-tabs, Loads, Details, Output Voltages and Properties.

Loads Tab
This tab is assign to add circuits to the distribution board and to allocated loads to those
circuits.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

To add a circuit or circuits, click View Designer. The Distribution Board Viewer window is
then displayed:

The window displays details of the distribution board and the current load balance.
The view will automatically zoom to display all circuits and loads at once.
The following viewing facilities are located at the bottom of the window:
• To view in and out use the Scale slider or plus and minus buttons.
• Click Scale to Fit to zoom out or in so that contents of the diagram fits the window.
To add a circuit, click either Add 1 Phase Way, Add 2 Phase Way, Add 2 Phase Way + N,
Add 3 Phase Way or Add 3 Phase Way + N as required.

Note: The Add 2 Phase Way + N and Add 3 Phase Way + N buttons are only available if
the Has Neutral checkbox on the Detail tab is checked.

If Add 1 Phase Way, Add 3 Phase Way or Add 3 Phase Way + N is clicked, the selected
circuit type is then added to the viewer. If Add 2 Phase Way or Add 2 Phase Way + N is
clicked, the Options window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Select the required phase option. The 2 phase way circuit is then added to the viewer, plus
a neutral termination if that option was selected.
Continue to add circuits as described above until all required circuits have been added. For
example:

Use the Undo and Redo buttons to remove or re-add circuits.


Once all required circuits have been added, click Save.
When the viewer is saved, a protection device with default details is automatically created
for each circuit phase. The rated current (by default, 0A) of these devices is displayed for
each phase in the viewer:

To view and edit details of a protection device, double-click on the phase in the viewer. The
Protection Device Detail window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Refer to Create Compartment Typicals for details of this window. Edit the default details as
required and click Save.
To add a load to a phase, select the phase and click Assign Load. The Assign Load (Drag
& Drop) window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Select one of the distribution board’s output voltages from the Output Voltage list. The
output voltages for a distribution board are viewed and specified using the Output Voltages
Tab.
The windows then lists the available loads (including supplies that may be loads) with
voltages matching the selected output voltage.
Select the required load by dragging and dropping it from the window onto a phase.
The load is the added to the view and the load balance figure is automatically updated. For
example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Note: Loads may also be assigned from the Loads tab as explained below.

To create, size and/or apply wiring rules to the cables between the distribution board and
any assigned loads, click Size Cables. The Cable Creation List window is then displayed:

The window list all potential cables from the distribution board to its assigned loads.
Each potential cable is listed with a default name in the format <distribution board
equipment number>/<load equipment number>. Enter a different name if required. If the
cable has already been created the cable name is “greyed out” and cannot be edited.
If a cable is to be created, check its Create checkbox.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:23 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

If it is to have a wiring rule applied to it, check its Run Wiring Rule checkbox.
If it is to be sized check its Size Cable checkbox.
If either the Run Wiring Rule or the Size Cable checkbox is checked, the Create checkbox
is checked automatically. If the Create checkbox is unchecked, the other two checkboxes
will be automatically unchecked.
Use the Select / Deselect All rows controls at the bottom of the window to check/uncheck
all checkboxes for the selected option.
Click Ok once the required options are selected. The selected cables are then created, and
where that option was selected, wiring rules assigned to the fed items are applied to the
cable, its terminations etc.
Cables for which the Size Cable checkbox is checked are sized using automatically
assigned parameters (length etc). The results of this procedure are then displayed in a log
window.
Once a cable has been created it is labelled with its name in the viewer. For example:

Details of a cable can be viewed and edited either by double-clicking on it, or right-clicking
on it and selecting Edit Cable from the menu that is then displayed. The Cable Details
window is then displayed. Refer to AVEVA Electrical Wiring Manager documentation for
details.
To delete a circuit, select it in the viewer by clicking on the circuit number (the circuit will be
outlined in blue if selected) and press the Delete keyboard button.
To print the design, click Print. A standard Print window is then opened.
To export to design to a PDF file, click Export to PDF. A standard Save file as window is
then opened.
Click Close to exit the window. The new circuits are then listed in the Loads tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:24 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

To assign a load to a circuit phase from the Loads tab, select the circuit phase and click on
the button that is displayed in the Equipment No. field when the mouse cursor is hovered
over it. The Assign Load window is then displayed:

Select one of the distribution board’s output voltages from the Output Voltage list. The
output voltages for a distribution board are viewed and specified using the Output Voltages
Tab.
The windows then lists the available loads (including supplies that may be loads) with
voltages matching the selected output voltage. Select the required load by double-clicking
on it or clicking on it and clicking Assign.
If, with the addition of the selected load, the sum of the rated power of the loads assigned to
the supply would be greater than the supplies rated power, a warning message is displayed.
For example:

Click Yes to assign the load anyway or No to cancel.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:25 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

The selected load is then displayed in the Equipment No. field for the circuit.
To un-assign a load from a circuit or circuits, select the circuit or circuits in the Loads tab
and click the Un-Assign button. A message is displayed requesting that the un-assignment
be confirmed. Click Yes to continue.
To delete circuits from a distribution board, select them from the Loads tab and click the
Delete Circuit button. A message is displayed requesting that the deletion be confirmed.
Click Yes to continue. The circuits are then deleted. Any loads assigned to deleted circuits
are un-assigned from the supply.

Details Tab

The Details tab is used to view and edit additional details of a busbar, specifically its name,
description, Rated Voltage (cannot be edited), Rated Load, Rated Current and Fault
Current.
Busbar incomers may also be added and edited using this tab, in the same way as for
MCCs and Switchboards. See Details Tab for details.

Output Voltages Tab

Loads fed by Distribution Boards must have a voltage matching one of the supply output
voltages listed on this tab. The default output voltages are displayed above.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:26 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Output voltages can be added and removed from this list as required. See Output Voltages
Tab for details.

Properties Tab

In the Properties tab, enter additional busbar properties as required.


Property names are setup from the Property Definitions option on the Project tab. Refer to
Property Definitions for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:27 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

5.1.5 Winding Tab - Transformers

The tab includes a sub-tab for each winding of the transformer.


Refer to Supply Detail Window for details of the fields in the Maximum Demand and
Diversity sections of the tab.
By default, new equipment has a single winding. If another winding is required, click Add
Winding. Another sub-tab is added to the tab. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:28 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

By default, each winding is assigned a name automatically, e.g. Secondary, Tertiary, 3, 4


etc. The name of a winding is displayed in the Winding Name field and may be changed.
If required, edit the voltage, load, current and fault current properties of the winding and add
a description.
Use the Delete Winding button to remove a selected winding - if there is only one winding it
cannot be removed.
Each winding tab includes four further sub-tabs, Loads, Details, Output Voltages and
Properties.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:29 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Loads Tab

This tab is used allocate loads to a transformer winding.


To assign a load to the winding, click the Assign button (the button will be disabled if a load
is already assigned).
The Assign Load window is then displayed:

Select one of the transformer’s output voltages from the Output Voltage list. The output
voltages for a transformer are viewed and specified using the Output Voltages Tab.
The windows then lists the available loads (including supplies that may be loads) with
voltages matching the selected output voltage. Select the required load by double-clicking
on it or clicking on it and clicking Assign.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:30 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

If, with the addition of the selected load, the sum of the rated power of the loads assigned to
the supply would be greater than the supplies rated power, a warning message is displayed.
For example:

Click Yes to assign the load anyway or No to cancel.


The load is then listed in the tab.
To un-assign the load, click the Un-Assign button. A message is displayed requesting that
the un-assignment be confirmed. Click Yes to continue.

Details Tab

The Details tab is used to view and edit additional details of a winding, such as its name,
description, impedance, voltage etc.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:31 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Output Voltages Tab

Loads fed by windings must have a voltage matching one of the supply output voltages
listed on this tab. The default output voltages are displayed above.
Output voltages can be added and removed from this list as required. See Output Voltages
Tab for details.

Properties Tab

In the Properties tab, enter additional winding properties as required.


Property names are setup from the Property Definitions option on the Project tab. Refer to
Property Definitions for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:32 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

5.1.6 Loads Assigned Tab - Junction Boxes, UPSs, Generators,


Miscellaneous Supplies, Variable Speed Drives and Sources

To assign a load to a junction box, UPS, generator, miscellaneous supply, variable speed
drive or source, click the Assign button on the Loads Assigned tab.
The Assign Load window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:33 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Select one of the supply’s output voltages from the Output Voltage list. The output voltages
for a supply are viewed and specified using the Output Voltages sub-tab of the Detail Tab.
The windows then lists the available loads (including supplies that may be loads) with
voltages matching the selected output voltage. Select the required load by double-clicking
on it or clicking on it and clicking Assign.
If, with the addition of the selected loads, the sum of the rated power of the loads assigned
to the supply would be greater than the supplies rated power, a warning message is
displayed, For example:

Click Yes to assign the load anyway or No to cancel.


The selected loads are then displayed on the tab:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:34 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

To un-assign loads, select them from the list and click the Un-Assign button. A message is
displayed requesting that the un-assignment be confirmed. Click Yes to continue.

5.1.7 Detail Tab

In the Detail tab, enter additional details of the supply.


If a schematic drawing is required to be generated for the supply in AVEVA Electrical
Designer, check the Schematic Dwg Req’d checkbox.
The External Cable Sizing Template field is used to assign an External Cable Sizing
template to a supply. See Allocate Cable Sizing Templates to Equipment for details.

Note: This field is not displayed for MCCs, switchboards and distribution boards. For these
types of supply, external cable sizing templates are assigned to incomers instead.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:35 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

See Details Tab for details.

For distribution boards, a Has Neutral checkbox is included. Check this checkbox if the
distribution board is to include neutral terminations.
Neutral terminations may then be added for the distribution board when using the
Distribution Board Viewer (see Loads Assigned Tab - Distribution Boards) to add circuits.

Note: Once checked, the checkbox may not be unchecked while there are any protection
devices assigned to a distribution board. All circuits must first be deleted.

If the supply is a transformer note that the Consumed Power fields are not present.
The lower part of the tab consists of two or three sub-tabs, depending on the supply type.
The General tab (see above) is used to enter general project related data.
The Datasheet tab is used to enter order information and to assign the supply to a
datasheet or to view and/or edit a datasheet if one is already assigned.

See Assign, View and Edit Datasheets for more details.


Loads fed by the supply must have a voltage matching one of the supply output voltages
listed on the Output Voltages tab. The default output voltages are displayed below.

Note: MCCs, Switchboards, Distribution Boards and Transformers do not have this tab. For
these supplies, output voltages are defined separately for each busbar or winding on
their Loads Assigned tabs.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:36 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Output voltages can be added and removed from this list as required. See Output Voltages
Tab for details.

5.1.8 Compartments Tab - MCCs and Switchboards

Details of MCC and Switchboard compartments, including compartment elements and their
details, are viewed, added and specified using the Compartments tab.
Expand the equipment node to view a node for each of the busbars. Expand a busbar node
to view the compartments in that busbar. Compartment nodes can then be expanded to view
the devices in a busbar.
For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:37 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Compartments can also be added automatically when loads are assigned, when incomer
protection devices are added, when couplers are created, and when busbars are added
using the Loads Assigned tab (refer to Loads Assigned Tab - MCCs and Switchboards for
details).
Default “Connector” elements will be created with automatically generated compartments.
These can subsequently be replaced in this tab.

Add and Edit Compartments


To add a compartment, select the busbar to which the compartment is to be assigned and
click Add. A new compartment is then added to the MCC or Switchboard with a default
name and details.
To edit the details of a compartment, double-click on the compartment row. The
Compartment Detail window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:38 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Edit the details as required.


The Compartment Typical field and button are used to assign a compartment typical to the
compartment, replacing the default Connector element (see below for more details).

Note: The Attached Documents link is used to access the Attached Documents window,
which is used to attach documents to the load and view a list of documents already
assigned. See Attachments (External Documents) for details.

New compartments are automatically added to the bottom of the list of compartments
assigned to a busbar. To change the position of a compartment in the list, select it and use
the Up and Down buttons.
To move a compartment to a different busbar, right-click on it. A list of the other busbars of
the supply is then displayed. Click on the required busbar to complete the re-assignment.

Add Compartment Elements


Elements can be added to compartments individually, or in bulk by selecting a compartment
typical.
Once a compartment typical has been defined for a compartment, individual elements
cannot be added to the compartment, nor can additional compartment typicals be selected.
To add an individual compartment element, select the compartment row and click Add. The
Select Equipment Type window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:39 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Double-click on the required equipment (compartment element) type, or click on it and then
click Select.

Note: Compartment element types are specified using the Compartment Element
Groups window. Refer to Compartment Element Types for details.

An element of the selected type is then added to the compartment with default details. For
example:

See below for how to edit compartment element details.


Add as many elements as required. Note that when the next element is added it will
automatically be assigned a fed item of the previous item. Its name will be displayed in the
Fed Item 1 field for that element. For example:

Change Fed Item Assignments


To assign an element to be fed from a different element in the compartment, right-click on it.
Select Feed from from the menu that is then displayed, then select the required element
from the sub-menu. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:40 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

The element will then be assigned as a fed item for the selected element. If that item is
already feeding another element, the element will added as a second fed item, and listed in
the Fed Item 2 field. For example:

If there is already a second fed item it will be moved to the third fed item slot, and so on

Note: Compartment elements may feed more than two other elements, but the window will
only display the first two.

Note: When a load that is not a compartment element is assigned to a compartment (for
example by using the Loads Assigned tab facilities), it is automatically added as the
first fed item of the last element added to the compartment, and listed in the Fed
Item 1 field for that element. If there is already a compartment element assigned as
that element’s first fed item, that element is automatically reassigned as the
element’s second fed item (and listed in its Fed Item 2 field). If there is already a
second fed item it will be moved to the third fed item slot, and so on.

Assign Elements from Compartment Typicals


To add the compartment elements specified in a compartment typical, double-click on the
compartment row. The Compartment Detail window is then displayed (see above).

Note: When a compartment typical is specified for a compartment, any compartment


elements already specified for that compartment are deleted and replaced by the
elements defined in the compartment typical.

Click on the button next to the Compartment Typical field. The Select from Catalogue
window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:41 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

The window lists the compartment typicals from the Compartment Typicals Catalogue.
Double-click on the required typical, or click on it and then click Select.
The Select from Catalogue window then closes and the selected typical is displayed in the
Compartment Typical field in the Compartment Detail window. For example:

Click OK. The compartment is then populated with the elements defined for the typical. For
example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:42 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Once a compartment typical has been defined for a compartment, individual elements
cannot be added to the compartment, nor can additional compartment typicals be selected.
To replace the compartment typical with a different compartment typical, repeat the above
procedure and select a different typical.
To remove the compartment typical without replacing it with another typical, access the
Select from Catalogue window and click the None button, then click the OK button of the
Compartment Detail window.
The following message is then displayed:

To delete the typical and its elements from the compartment, click No.
To unassign the typical from the compartment, but without deleting the elements, click Yes.
If this option is selected, the “typical” elements are replaced with individual compartment
elements with the same details as the typical elements.

Edit Compartment Element Details


To edit the details of a compartment element, double-click on the element row. The Details
window for the element is then displayed. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:43 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Note: Connector type compartment elements cannot be edited. These are “place-holder”
elements which are automatically added to automatically generated compartments
(e.g. those created for incomers and couplers).

The automatically generated names displayed in the Name field are taken from the short
form name of the selected compartment element type, suffixed with a number. For elements
from compartment typicals, these cannot be changed. For other elements, these may be
amended if required.
Add or edit details in the Catalogue Information section of the window as required. The
details in this section can also be completed by selecting an element from the Compartment
Elements Catalogue.
If an element is selected from the catalogue, the details of the element in the compartment
are automatically changed when the details if the catalogue element is changed.
Details of elements selected from the catalogue can only be changed directly by
“customising” them: the fields in the Catalogue Information section of the window are not
accessible by the user. Customising breaks the link between the element in the
compartment and the catalogue element, i.e. changes to the catalogue element will no
longer result in the compartment element being changed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:44 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Click the Customize button. A message is then displayed requesting that the user confirm
that customisation is required. Click Yes. The fields in the Catalogue Information section
then become editable.

Move Compartments to Other Busbars


To move a compartment and its contents to another busbar or the MCC or Switchboards,
right-click on the compartment. From the menu that is then displayed, select Move
Compartment to.

The other busbars are then listed in a sub-menu. Select the required busbar. The
compartment and its elements are then moved to that busbar.

Reassign Loads to Other Compartments


Loads can be moved from one compartment to another compartment of the supply. To
reassign a load, right-click the compartment it is currently in. From the menu that is then
displayed, select Reassign Load to. A sub-menu that lists all busbars with compartments
that have compatible voltages is then displayed.

Select the required busbar. A further sub-menu listing that busbar’s available compartments
is then displayed. Click the compartment that the load is to be moved to.
The Options window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:45 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

If the elements in the source compartment are also to be moved to the target compartment,
click Move the Elements from the source Compartment to the target Compartment. If
this option is selected, the elements in the target compartment will be deleted.
If the elements in the source compartment are to be left in the source compartment, click
Don’t move the Elements from the source Compartment. From the list below this option,
select the compartment element that the load will be assigned to as its fed item. On
reassignment, the load will be listed in the Fed Item 1 field of that element.
When the required option is selected, click OK to complete the reassignment.

Delete Compartments and Compartment Elements


To delete a compartment or compartment element, select it and then select Delete. A
message is then displayed asking that the deletion be confirmed. Click Yes to complete the
deletion of the compartment or element. When a compartment is deleted any elements it
contains are also deleted.
Compartment elements added as part of a compartment typical cannot be deleted in this
way. The compartment typical must be removed from the compartment as described above.

5.2 Edit a Tag in the Supplies List


To edit an load tag, highlight the tag in the Supplies List and click Edit in the Records
section of the Home tab, or double-click on the tag.

Note: Supplies can also be edited from the Equipment List.

If the sum of the rated power of the loads assigned to the supply is greater than the supplies
rated power, a warning message is displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:46 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Click OK to continue.
The Supplies Details window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:47 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

The window is identical to that opened when creating a supply (see Manually Add a Tag to
the Supplies List), except as described below.

Last Edit Field


The Last Edit field displays the date and time when the supply data was last edited. The
user name of the individual that performed the edit is displayed in a tool-tip when the mouse
cursor is hovered over the field. Click the button in the field to display the Audit Manager,
which will display a list of all the changes to the load data.

Attached Documents Link


This link is used to access the Attached Documents window, which is used to attach
documents to the supply and the a list of documents already assigned. See Attachments
(External Documents) for details.
The number next to the link is the number of documents currently attached to the supply.

Properties Tab
When a supply is opened for editing an additional tab, Properties, is displayed:

Use this tab to enter additional equipment and process data properties as required. Click on
the appropriate Select Properties Type option and enter or edit values as required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:48 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

Property names are setup from the Property Definitions option on the Project tab. Refer to
Property Definitions for details.

5.3 Edit Multiple Supplies


A facility is provided to edit the engineering data of multiple supplies at once.
The tag formats of multiple supplies may also be changed.
These facilities are identical to those provided for editing multiple loads. Refer to:
• Edit Engineering Data for Multiple Loads
• Edit Tag Formats of Multiple Loads

5.4 Assign, View and Edit Datasheets


There are various methods for assigning a supply to a datasheet, and having done so,
viewing and editing the associated datasheet.
Continue at:
• Assign Supplies to Datasheets
• View/Edit Datasheets

5.4.1 Assign Supplies to Datasheets


To assign a supply to a datasheet either:
• From the Supplies List, for supplies that have not had datasheets assigned to them,
click on the button in the Datasheet No column cell of a supply, displayed when the
mouse is hovered over it.
or,
• Click the button in the Datasheet No field on the Detail - Datasheet tab of the Supply
Details window (see Manually Add a Tag to the Supplies List). The Add Datasheet for
window is then displayed. See Datasheets for details.
or,
• While creating or editing a datasheet (see Add New Datasheets and Edit Datasheet
Information) assign the supply using the facilities of the Tags tab of the Datasheet
Information window.
Note: At least one catalogue datasheet for an equipment type must exist before supplies of
that type can be assigned to a datasheet.

5.4.2 View/Edit Datasheets


To view and/or edit the datasheet assigned to a load either:
• From the Supplies List, for supplies that have had datasheets assigned to them, click
on the button in the Datasheet No column cell of a supply, displayed when the mouse
is hovered over it.
or,
• Click the button in the Datasheet No field on the Detail - Datasheet tab of the Supply
Details window (see Manually Add a Tag to the Supplies List).
or,
• From the Datasheets List, double-click on the Datasheet record or highlight the record
in the Datasheets list and click Open on the List Tools - Datasheets tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:49 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

The datasheet is then shown by the Datasheets viewer. Refer to Datasheet Data Entry.

5.5 Copy Supplies


Engineer supports copying of existing supplies to create new tags.
Select the existing tag record in the Supplies List and select Copy Selected from the drop-
down menu next to the New option on the Home tab.
AVEVA Electrical will display a new Supply Detail window containing all the copied data in
the window.
Change the details as required. Make sure the Equipment No. is changed.
Click Save.

5.6 Import Data


Data can be imported into the Supplies List from various sources.
Continue at:
• Import Supply Data from Excel
• AVEVA P&ID Supply Tags Import
• AVEVA Schematic Model Supply Tags Import
• AVEVA Tags Supply Tags Import
• AVEVA Diagrams Supply Tags Import

5.6.1 Import Supply Data from Excel


Users may import supply data into the AVEVA Electrical project database from a Microsoft
Excel Workbook.
This facility for supplies is the same as that for loads. Refer to Loads List for details.

5.6.2 AVEVA P&ID Supply Tags Import


Supply data may be imported from AVEVA P&ID in the same way as load data. Refer to
AVEVA P&ID Load Tags Import for details.

5.6.3 AVEVA Schematic Model Supply Tags Import


Supply data may be imported from AVEVA Schematic Model in the same way as load data.
Refer to AVEVA Schematic Model Load Tags Import for details.

5.6.4 AVEVA Tags Supply Tags Import


Supply data may be imported from AVEVA Tags in the same way as load data. Refer to
AVEVA Engineering Load Tags Import for details.

5.6.5 AVEVA Diagrams Supply Tags Import


Supply data may be imported from AVEVA Diagrams in the same way as load data. Refer to
AVEVA Diagrams Load Tag Import for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:50 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

5.7 Single Line Check Reports for Supplies


The Single Line Check Report facility is used to view the Single Line Diagram for a supply.
To open the Single Line Check Report for a load, open the Supply Detail window for the
load.
Click the Single Line Check Report button. The report is then displayed in a new window
with the supply tag as its title:

The report is automatically generated using the default distribution diagram symbols defined
for the project (see Add and Edit Distribution Diagram Project Symbols).
Click Save Layout to save the SLD to the Distribution Diagrams list. The diagram is saved
with the load tag as its document number.
Refer to View/Edit Distribution Diagrams for further details, including information on how to
edit diagrams.

5.8 Attachments (External Documents)


In the same way as for load tags, Engineer supports attaching external documents/files to
supply tags and allows the viewing of any attached document by clicking on the attachment.
Refer to Attachments (External Documents) for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:51 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Supplies List

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:52 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Packages List

6 Packages List

The Packages List is the main window for adding/editing equipment packages in your
project and for assigning equipment to them. The viewable columns, their captions, column
size and order are user definable using the Grid Manager utility.

Access the Packages List


To open the Packages list, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the Home
tab.
Select Packages from the list of grids that is then displayed. The Packages list grid is then
displayed:

Refer to Working with the Data Grid for information on the grid controls including selecting a
record, and sorting and filtering the grid data.
The Packages list consists of two grids. The main, upper grid displays general details of the
packages in the project. The lower grid displays details of any equipment assigned to the
package currently selected in the upper grid.
To edit data in either grid the user can either double-click on a record, or to edit a package
record, select it and click Edit on the Home tab. The user can also edit most column data
directly in the grid itself by selecting the cell and entering a new value, selecting a value
from a pick list etc. Columns with a yellow coloured background cannot be edited directly in
the grid.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Packages List

Grid PickLists
Some grid cells contain picklists. The value lists in each pick list are generally loaded from
both the PickList library, plus any value that has been entered into the pick list's field.
Therefore manually adding a value into the pick list will add that new value to the picklist for
future use.

Note: A pick list may be set so that grid cells must be completed with the values in it, i.e.
other values may not be manually entered.

Note: Any value manually added directly into a grid pick list does not get added to the
picklist's value list until the Refresh toolbar command is used or the grid is re-loaded
(e.g. Electrical Engineer is re-started).

Refer to Using PickLists for further information on editing pick lists.

6.1 Add Equipment Package


To create a new equipment package, with the Packages List open click New in the Records
section of the Home tab to display the Equipment Package window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Packages List

Select a plant area and enter a unique name for the package. Complete the other details as
required.
The lower part of the window includes three tabs: Equipment, Reference Drawings and
User Fields. Equipment is assigned to the package using the Equipment tab.

Equipment Tab
This tab lists any equipment already assigned to the package.
To assign equipment to the package, click the Assign button. The Equipment List window
is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Packages List

All Electrical equipment within the selected area, including equipment created in AVEVA
Electrical Wiring Manager (i.e. field devices, local control stations and PLC cabinets), is
listed. Equipment shared from AVEVA Instrumentation is not listed.
Select the required equipment by checking the appropriate checkboxes in the Select
column, then click Assign. The selected equipment is then listed in the Equipment tab.

To un-assign equipment from a package, check its Select checkbox in the Equipment tab
and click Un-Assign. A message will be displayed requesting that the un-assignment be
confirmed. Click Yes to continue.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Packages List

Reference Drawings Tab

Complete this tab with details of the reference drawings associated with the package.

User Fields Tab

Complete the user-defined fields in this tab as required.

6.2 Edit Packages and Package Equipment


Edit a Package
To edit a package, highlight it in the Packages List and click Edit in the Records section of
the Home tab, or double-click on the package record.
The Equipment Package window is then displayed. See Add Equipment Package. Edit the
package details as required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Packages List

Edit Package Equipment


To edit equipment in a package, double-click on it in the lower grid of the Packages List.
If the equipment is a load or a supply, the Load Detail window or Supply Detail window is
displayed as appropriate. Refer to Edit a Tag in the Loads List and Edit a Tag in the
Supplies List for details.
If the equipment is a field device, local control station and PLC cabinet from AVEVA
Electrical Wiring Manager, the Equipment Detail window is then displayed.

Equipment Tab
The Equipment tab displays basic details of the equipment. Amend these as required.
To access more detailed data for editing, access as required the Load Detail window or
Supply Detail window from the Loads list or the Supplies list (refer to Edit a Tag in the
Loads List and Edit a Tag in the Supplies List for details), or the appropriate window in
AVEVA Electrical Wiring Manager.

Properties Tab
In the Properties tab to enter additional equipment and process data properties as required.
Click on the appropriate Select Properties Type option and enter or edit values as
required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Packages List

Property names are setup from the Property Definitions option on the Project tab. Refer to
Property Definitions for details.

Last Edit Field


The Last Edit field displays the date and time when the equipment data was last edited.
The user name of the individual that performed the edit is displayed in a tool-tip when the
mouse cursor is hovered over the field. Click the button in the field to display the Audit
Manager, which will display a list of all the changes to the load data.

Attached Documents Link


This link is used to access the Attached Documents window, which is used to attach
documents to the equipment and the a list of documents already assigned. See
Attachments (External Documents) for details.
The number next to the link is the number of documents currently attached to the
equipment.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Packages List

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment List

7 Equipment List

All electrical equipment in the project is listed in the Equipment list grid, including
equipment created in AVEVA Electrical Wiring Manager and in AVEVA Instrumentation
Wiring Manager if the project data is being shared with Instrumentation.
From this list, new loads and supplies can be created and details of all types of equipment
can be viewed and edited. The viewable columns, their captions, column size and order are
user definable using the Grid Manager utility.

Access the Equipment List


To open the Equipment List, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the Home
tab.
Select Equipment under the Lists heading from the list of grids that is then displayed. The
Equipment grid is then displayed:

Refer to Working with the Data Grid for information on the grid controls including selecting a
record, and sorting and filtering the grid data.
To edit data the user can either double-click on a record, or select it and click Edit on the
Home tab. The user can also edit most column data directly in the Grid itself by selecting the
cell and entering a new value, selecting a value from a Pick list etc. Columns with a yellow
coloured background cannot be edited directly in the grid.
Equipment shared from AVEVA Instrumentation cannot be edited.

Grid PickLists
Some grid cells contain picklists. The value lists in each pick list are generally loaded from
both the PickList library, plus any value that has been entered into the pick list's field.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment List

Therefore manually adding a value into the pick list will add that new value to the picklist for
future use.

Note: A pick list may be set so that grid cells must be completed with the values in it, i.e.
other values may not be manually entered.

Note: Any value manually added directly into a grid pick list does not get added to the
picklist's value list until the Refresh toolbar command is used or the grid is re-loaded
(e.g. Electrical Engineer is re-started).

Refer to Using PickLists for further information on editing pick lists.

Equipment List - Lists Tool Options

The following options are located on the List Tools - Electrical Equipment tab:

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Attached Documents Section

Open All Opens a list of the documents attached to the selected supplies.
Refer to Attachments (External Documents) for details.

Attach Document Enables the selected supply to be linked to an external


document (e.g. Vendor Data PDF, Calibration Sheet Word
Document etc.). Refer to Attachments (External Documents) for
details.

Adding New Tags to the Equipment List


For details of how to add equipment to the list, refer to Manually Add a Tag to the Equipment
List.
Equipment can also added to the list by copying existing equipment (see Copy Equipment),
by importing from Excel (see Import Equipment Data from Excel), from AVEVA P&ID (see
AVEVA P&ID Equipment Tags Import), from AVEVA Schematics (see AVEVA Schematic
Model Equipment Tags Import), from AVEVA Tags (see AVEVA Tags Equipment Tags
Import) and from AVEVA Diagrams (see AVEVA Diagrams Equipment Tags Import).

7.1 Manually Add a Tag to the Equipment List


To manually add a new equipment tag to a project, with the Equipment List open click New
in the Records section of the Home tab to display the Select Equipment Type window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment List

Double-click on required equipment type, or click on it and then click Select.

Note: Field devices, local control stations and PLC cabinets may be viewed and edited in
the Equipment list, but not created in it using this method. They must be created in
Wiring Manager.

The Equipment Tag window is then displayed:

This window is used to specify the tag of the new equipment.


The Class list consists of all classes to which tag formats have been assigned (refer to
Class Definitions for details of classes and tag format allocation). Select the required class.
The Tag Format list is then populated with all the tag formats that have been assigned to
the selected class (the class designated the primary class is automatically pre-selected).
Select the required tag format from this list.
The fields displayed under the Tag Format list will depend on the fields that the selected tag
format consist of (refer to Tag Formats for details).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment List

If the “Free Form” tag format is selected (see above), simply enter the required tag in the
Equipment No field.
If a different tag format is selected, the displayed fields will change to reflect this. For
example:

Note that any delimiters defined for tag format are displayed after the fields they follow.
Complete the fields as required. Note that if the tag format includes “Function”, the list of
available functions (codes) will be restricted to the equipment type codes associated with
the selected class (refer to Equipment Type Catalogue for details).
The entered tag number is displayed at the bottom of the window. For example:

When the required tag data has been entered, click OK.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment List

If a load equipment type was selected, the Load Detail window is then displayed.

Refer to Manually Add a Tag to the Loads List for information on how to use this window to
create a load.
If a supply equipment type was created, the Supply Details window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment List

Refer to Manually Add a Tag to the Supplies List for information on how to use this window
to create a supply.

7.2 Edit Equipment


To edit equipment, highlight it in the Equipment List and click Edit in the Records section of
the Home tab, or double-click on the record.
If a load equipment type was selected, the Load Detail window is then displayed. Refer to
Edit a Tag in the Loads List for information on how to use this window to edit a load.
If a supply equipment type was selected, the Supply Detail window is then displayed. Refer
to Edit a Tag in the Supplies List for information on how to use this window to edit a supply.
If a field device, junction box, local control station or PLC cabinet from AVEVA
Instrumentation Wiring Manager is selected, the following message is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment List

If a field device, local control station and PLC cabinet from AVEVA Electrical Wiring
Manager is selected, the Equipment Detail window is displayed:

Equipment Tab
The Equipment tab displays basic details of the equipment. Amend these as required.
To change the tag number, click the button next to the Equipment No field to display the
Equipment Tag window again.
To access more detailed data for editing, access the appropriate window in AVEVA
Electrical Wiring Manager.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment List

Properties Tab
In the Properties tab to enter additional equipment and process data properties as required.
Click on the appropriate Select Properties Type option and enter or edit values as
required.

Property names are setup from the Property Definitions option on the Project tab. Refer to
Property Definitions for details.

Last Edit Field


The Last Edit field displays the date and time when the equipment data was last edited.
The user name of the individual that performed the edit is displayed in a tool-tip when the
mouse cursor is hovered over the field. Click the button in the field to display the Audit
Manager, which will display a list of all the changes to the load data.

Attached Documents Link


This link is used to access the Attached Documents window, which is used to attach
documents to the equipment and the a list of documents already assigned. See
Attachments (External Documents) for details.
The number next to the link is the number of documents currently attached to the
equipment.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment List

7.3 Edit Multiple Equipment


Multiple equipment records may be edited.
To edit multiple records, select multiple records in the Equipment List, click Edit in the
Records section of the Home tab. The following message is then displayed:

Click Yes.
If any AVEVA Instrumentation equipment was selected, a message is displayed warning that
this equipment will be excluded from the edit. For example:

The Multi Field Edit (Bulk Edit) window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment List

Actions required to edit multiple tags:


• Check the Select checkbox for all columns to be edited.
• Enter the new value required in the Value column
(repeat for all columns to be updated).
• Click Save to save the data to all selected tags.
Note: The Copy first record's Data option will copy the data from the first record selected
in the Grid View into the window ready for editing. The data is not actually copied to
the selected tags unless the Select checkbox is selected and the Save button is
clicked.

Note: The columns in this window are the same as the columns in the current Grid view as
defined by the Grid Manager.

7.4 Copy Equipment


Engineer supports copying of existing equipment to create new equipment.
Select the existing tag record in the Equipment List and select Copy Selected from the
drop-down menu next to the New option on the Home tab.
If a load is being copied, refer to Copy Loads for details.
If a supply is being copied, refer to Copy Supplies for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment List

Equipment from AVEVA Electrical Wiring Manager cannot be copied. If an attempt is made,
he following message is displayed:

Equipment from AVEVA Instrumentation cannot be copied. If an attempt is made, the


following message is displayed:

7.5 Import Data


Data can be imported into the Equipment List from various sources.
Continue at:
• Import Equipment Data from Excel
• AVEVA P&ID Equipment Tags Import
• AVEVA Schematic Model Equipment Tags Import
• AVEVA Tags Equipment Tags Import
• AVEVA Diagrams Equipment Tags Import

7.5.1 Import Equipment Data from Excel


Users may import equipment data into the AVEVA Electrical project database from a
Microsoft Excel Workbook.
This facility for equipment is the same as that for loads. Refer to Loads List for details.

7.5.2 AVEVA P&ID Equipment Tags Import


Equipment data may be imported from AVEVA P&ID in the same way as load data. Refer to
AVEVA P&ID Load Tags Import for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment List

7.5.3 AVEVA Schematic Model Equipment Tags Import


Equipment data may be imported from AVEVA Schematic Model in the same way as load
data. Refer to AVEVA Schematic Model Load Tags Import for details.

7.5.4 AVEVA Tags Equipment Tags Import


Equipment data may be imported from AVEVA Tags in the same way as load data. Refer to
AVEVA Engineering Load Tags Import for details.

7.5.5 AVEVA Diagrams Equipment Tags Import


Equipment data may be imported from AVEVA Diagrams in the same way as load data.
Refer to AVEVA Diagrams Load Tag Import for details.

7.6 Attachments (External Documents)


In the same way as for load tags, Engineer supports attaching external documents/files to
equipment tags in general and allows the viewing of any attached document by clicking on
the attachment.
Refer to Attachments (External Documents) for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

8 Datasheets

Datasheets are stand-alone documents which the user can view, edit or exchange with third
parties. Refer to Datasheets (Specifications) for further information on the available
features.
Continue at:
• View/Edit Equipment Datasheets
• Datasheets List
• Add New Datasheets
• Assign Tags To Datasheets
• Edit Datasheet Information
• Delete Datasheet Options
• Print Datasheets
• Datasheet Revisions
• Datasheet Issues
• Import Datasheets from Excel
• Datasheet Publishing
• Merge Datasheets into a Single Document
• Document List
• Datasheet Form Catalogue
• View Data by Datasheet Form Type

8.1 View/Edit Equipment Datasheets


Engineer enables the user to view and edit equipment datasheets as follows:
• From the Datasheets List, either double-click on the Datasheet record or highlight the
record in the Datasheets list and click Open on the List Tools - Datasheets tab.
• From the Loads List and Supplies List, for loads and supplies that have had datasheets
assigned to them, click on the button that is displayed in the Datasheet No cell when
the mouse is hovered over it.
• When editing a load or a supply, on the Detail tab - Datasheet sub-tab of the Load
Detail or Supply Detail window, click the button in the Datasheet No field.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

The datasheet is then displayed in the Datasheet viewer. Refer to the Datasheet Data Entry
for details.

Note: If the equipment is not currently assigned to a datasheet when the button in the
Loads List and Supplies List, or on the Datasheet tab is clicked, then Engineer will
prompt users to assign it. Refer to Add New Datasheets for details of how to
accomplish this.

8.1.1 Datasheet Data Entry


A datasheet in opened in the Datasheet viewer window, with the datasheet number as its
title. Use this window to enter, view and edit datasheet details.

In this window, a number of facilities are available, as described below.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Enter or Modify Data


To enter or edit data, double-click any cell and type in the data. If the cell has a PickList, the
user can select a value from the drop-down list. Refer to Using PickLists.

Note: Only changes made to engineering data and data associated with form type can be
saved in this window. Changes made to Revisions, the Document Number and Tag
Numbers within this window cannot be saved from this window. To make these
changes use the appropriate equipment list, Datasheet List and Datasheet List
Revisions windows.

Copy Data from another Datasheet

Copy Data from another Datasheet


Data may be copied from any other tag assigned to the same datasheet Catalogue type
using the Copy button. Refer to Copy Tag Data during Data Entry topic.

Editing a PickList
If a cell has a PickList attached, then if that cell was right-clicked on, a pop-up menu is
displayed. Select Edit PickList Values from that menu. The PickList edit window is then
displayed, in which values can be added, edited or changed in the selected PickList.
For example:

Refer to Using PickLists for further information on editing PickLists.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Data Entry Command Buttons

Save Saves the data values to the database and opens it in an Excel
spreadsheet.

Save & Exit The Save & Exit option is accessed from a drop-
down list next to Save and saves the data values to
the database and to the Excel spreadsheet and
closes the datasheet.

Copy Enables users to copy another instrument tag's or catalogue


instrument's datasheet data to the tag targeted on the current
datasheet. To target a tag as being the tag to copy to, double-click in its
Tag Number cell prior to clicking this Copy command. Engineer then
displays a window containing a list of all tags and catalogue
instruments assigned to the same datasheet Catalogue form type to
choose from. Refer to Copy Tag Data during Data Entry.

Undo Undoes the last change made. Any subsequent undo will roll back each
previous change.

Redo Reverses the last undo (see above) made.

Print Saves the data and prints the datasheet.

Print to PDF Saves the data and opens it in a PDF window.

Note: The Print and Save commands use Microsoft Excel, therefore Excel must be
installed on the workstation to if these facilities are to be used. The Print
command uses the print area, print setup (Margins, scales etc.) as defined in the
datasheet Catalogue template file for the current project.

Preview Opens a print preview of the datasheet.

Issue Issues the datasheet by taking a snapshot of the data in the


datasheet's mapped cells and saves it to database for future reference.
This enables AVEVA Electrical to show changes between Issues.
The Issue option and its sub-menu options are not available for
datasheets assigned to catalogue equipment.
If the document has previously been issued, an Issue message window
is displayed informing the user to create a new revision before issuing.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Click Cancel to cancel the issue or OK to create a new revision. Refer


to Datasheet Revisions for further information on creating a new
revision.
After creating a new revision, the document is issued and an Issue
message window is displayed asking if the issued document should be
printed. Click Yes to sent to the document to the default printer or No to
close the Issue message window without printing the document.

Load Previous Loads the datasheet in a read-only window with the


Issue values it had at a selected issue.

Highlight Issue Highlights the cells containing values that have


Changes changed since a selected issue.

Reset Resets the datasheet to its last saved / opened state by clearing
"changed" cells and reverting the values back to original values.

Zoom Zooms the Datasheet Layout area according to the value selected from
drop down. Use buttons to decrement or increment the zoom.

Preferences Opens Datasheet Change Preferences window.

Apply Default If this option is checked, then on the update of a value in a datasheet
Units cell, the default unit is appended with the value if no unit is had been
entered previously.

Close Exits without saving changes to the database.

Note: Right-clicking on a cell displays a special menu enabling insertion of special


characters (° ± ² ³ ¼ ½ ¾ ?).

8.1.2 Copy Tag Data during Data Entry


Data may be copied from any other tag assigned to the same datasheet Catalogue type.
Click the Copy button on the Datasheet Data Entry window. The Copying Data to window is
then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

The grid shows all fields associated with the datasheet as defined in the Datasheet
Catalogue Grid.

Select a Tag to Select the tag from which data is to be copied from this list. Only
Copy From tag numbers assigned to the same datasheet form type will be
available for selection.

Accept Check this checkbox for the fields to be copied.

Note: To select all fields check the Accept All checkbox

Show Process Checking the Show Process Data checkbox displays the
Data process data in the grid view.

Field The field name (as defined in the Datasheet Catalogue).

Existing Value The current value of each field for the target tag.

Proposed Value The data about to be copied, if accepted, from the selected
source tag, as chosen from the Select a Tag to Copy From list.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

After all required fields values are selected, click Save to copy the data to the current tag or
Cancel to exit without copying data.

Note: Only fields associated with the datasheet are available to copy. Copying data such
as Tag Number, or Equipment Number or Datasheet title and Revision data is not
possible with this feature.

Note: If the selected tag or catalogue equipment type is associated with a datasheet with a
different form type from the tag or catalogue equipment being copied to, a message
is displayed to inform the user of this and to give the option of keeping the existing
datasheet or replacing it with a datasheet derived from the form type linked to the
selected tag or catalogue equipment.

8.1.3 Datasheet Change Preferences


The Datasheet Change Preferences window enables users to set their own datasheet
change highlighting method for all project datasheets.
Access the window by clicking Preferences on the Datasheet Data Entry window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

These preferences affect the Datasheet Data Entry window and printed datasheets when
using the Print with Previous Issue's Changes print option and are applied once a
datasheet is Issued.

Note: In a multi-user environment there will only be one set of preferences that will be
applied to all the users, i.e. each user cannot have their own preferences.

Issue Changes:

Font Select the font from the drop down to show in issue change highlighting.

Font Size Select or enter the font size of the text in issue change highlighting.

Bold Specify whether the text in issue change highlighting will be bold or not.

Back Colour Select the back colour for issue change highlighting of cells.

Fore Colour Select the text colour for issue change highlighting of cells.

Current Changes:

Font Select the font from the drop down to show in current change
highlighting.

Font Size Select or enter the font size of the text in current change highlighting.

Bold Specify whether the text in current change highlighting will be bold or
not.

Back Colour Select the back colour for current change highlighting of cells.

Fore Colour Select the text colour for current change highlighting of cells.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Printing:

Watermark The text that appears as watermark on each Datasheet when printing if
there are any changed values since the last issue.

Note: To stop AVEVA Electrical from adding a watermark set this to the
word: NONE.

8.2 Datasheets List


The Datasheets List is the main grid for adding/editing datasheets. Datasheets in this grid
are listed by document number. By default all datasheets assigned to equipment in the
project are shown in the grid.

Access the Datasheets List


To open the Datasheets List, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the Home
tab.
Select Datasheets under the Lists heading from the list of grids that is then displayed. The
Datasheets List grid is then displayed:

Datasheets List - List Tools Options

The following options are located on the List Tools - Datasheets tab

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Action Section

Open Open the selected datasheet for editing/viewing/print previewing of the


technical data (editing of title block and revision information should be
done from the Edit button). Displays the Datasheet Data Entry window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Update Displays the Update options window which updates the spreadsheets
of the selected datasheets with the current project data. If an Excel
workbook file does not exists the file is created in the project's
datasheet folder.

Update with Updates spreadsheets of selected datasheets with the changes


Changes highlighted in the previous issues of the datasheets.

Issue Issues and updates selected datasheet(s). It takes a snapshot of the


data in the datasheet's mapped cells and saves it to database for future
reference. Refer to Datasheet Issues for further information.

Open Issues Displays the Issues window listing all the issues of the selected
For Selected datasheet. Refer to View a List of Previous Issues for further
information.

Open Issues Displays the Issues window listing all the issues of all datasheets in the
For All list. Refer to View a List of Previous Issues for further information.

Revisions Displays a list of all datasheets and their revisions. Refer to Viewing and
Editing Multiple Datasheet Revisions.

Add Displays the Revision Entry window, used to add a revision to the
Revision currently selected datasheet. Refer to Create a Revision.

Edit Displays the Revision Entry window, used to edit the current revision of
Revision a selected datasheet. Refer to Edit a Revision.

Tools Section

Batch Displays the Batch Assign Tags to Datasheets window, which lists all
Assign Tags equipment tags not yet assigned to a datasheet and provides facilities
for the assignment/creation of multiple tags to datasheets in a batch
process. Refer to Batch Assign Multiple Tags to Datasheets for details.

Printing Section

Number of Select the number of copies required for printing.


Copies

Print Print all selected datasheet(s).

Print with Prints with changes from the previous issue highlighted.
Changes

Print To PDF Creates a PDF file of the selected datasheets.

Print To PDF Creates a PDF file of the selected datasheets with changes from the
with previous issue highlighted.
Changes

. Refer to Print Datasheets for further information on these options

Export Section

To External Publishes documents to the area that was set up using the Setup >
System Datasheets Publishing Configuration option on the Project tab.
Refer to Datasheet Publishing.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

To Displays a window in which the selected documents can be merged into


Document a single document, which is then added to the Document List and can
List be published. Refer to Merge Datasheets into a Single Document for
further information.

Selected Datasheets

Copy / Archive to Used to export datasheet files to a folder


Folder defined during the export process. Refer to
Export Datasheets to a Specified Folder.

Copy / Archive to Used to export datasheet files to a folder


Folder with Changes defined during the export process with
changes from the previous issue highlighted.
Refer to Export Datasheets to a Specified
Folder.

Copy to User Defined Used to export datasheet files to a pre-defined


Names folder or folders with file names in a pre-
defined, user-defined format. Refer to
Exporting Datasheets.

Copy to User Defined Used to export datasheet files to a pre-defined


Names with Changes folder or folders with file names in a pre-
defined, user-defined format, with changes
from the previous issue highlighted. Refer to
Exporting Datasheets.

8.3 Add New Datasheets


New datasheets can be created from the Datasheets List, Loads List and Supplies List, as
follows:
• To add a new Datasheet from the Datasheets list, click New in the Records section of
the Home tab. The Add Datasheet window is displayed
• To add a new Datasheet from the Loads or Supplies list, either click the button that
appears when the mouse is hovered over the Datasheet No cell, or on the Detail tab -
Datasheet sub-tab of the Load Detail or Supply Detail window for equipment, click
the button next to the Datasheet No field.
If the equipment has not been assigned to a datasheet, the Add Datasheet for:
window is displayed (if it has been assigned, the datasheet will be opened in the
Datasheet Data Entry window).
The Add a new Datasheet window and the Add Datasheet for: window are very similar.
The differences are that the Add Datasheet for: window only lists datasheet form types
relevant to the type of the equipment, and that the equipment type and the area of the
equipment are displayed in the window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Enter details for the new datasheet as follows:


1. Enter a datasheet number in the Datasheet No field.
Note: The number will be used as the document number, as appearing on the printed
datasheet form, and as the file name used by the Excel spreadsheet.

2. Enter a sheet or page number in the Sheet/Page No field, unless the Use Next Sheet
No checkbox is checked.
If the Use Next Sheet No checkbox is checked, AVEVA Electrical will automatically
use the next available sheet number by searching for all other datasheets with the
same Datasheet No and using next highest sheet number. If none are found then
AVEVA Electrical uses '1'.
Note: The document number is made up of: 'Data Sheet No' + '-' + 'Sheet/Page No'. When
the new datasheet is saved, AVEVA Electrical will check that this document number
is unique. If the combination of Datasheet No and Sheet/Page No has been used
before, an error message is displayed. A different combination must then be entered.

3. Select the required datasheet Form Type from the list provided (from the Datasheet
Catalogue Grid).
4. Click Next > to create the new datasheet. The new, blank, datasheet is then added to
the Datasheet List and the Add a New Datasheet window is displayed, used to assign
tag(s) to the datasheet and to add of other information relevant to the new datasheet.
The window then changes to display more facilities for entering datasheet information:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

The datasheet number and sheet number are displayed.


If the window was accessed from the Add Datasheet for: window, the plant area will be
completed with that of the equipment. A different plant area may be selected if required.
If the window was accessed from the Add a new Datasheet window, a plant area must be
selected from the Plant Area list.
Complete the Contract No., Requisition No. and Purchase Order fields as required.
The lower part of the window includes five tabs: Tags, Revisions, Notes, User Fields and
Others.

Tags Tab

If the window was accessed from the Add Datasheet for: window, the tag number of the
equipment will already be assigned to the datasheet and displayed in this tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

If the window was accessed from the Add a new Datasheet window a tag number (or
multiple tag numbers if the catalogue datasheet was designed to allow for multiple tags)
must now be assigned.
Double-click on any empty Tag Number record to display the Select Tag(s) to Assign to
Datasheet window (see Assign Tags To Datasheets for details) listing all tags that have not
already been assigned to a datasheet.

Note: The number of tags that can be assigned to a datasheet is defined in the Datasheet
Catalogue for the current form type.

Double-clicking on a tag record, or selecting it and clicking Open will open as appropriate
the Load Detail window or the Supply Detail window, in which the tag may be edited. See
Edit a Tag in the Loads List and Edit a Tag in the Supplies List.

Revisions Tab
The Revision Tab displays the revision history for the selected datasheet. The number of
revisions displayed and the column descriptions can be changed using the Options
window. For more information, refer to Options.

Use the following buttons to add, edit and delete revisions:

Add Displays the Revision Entry window, used to add a new revision to
current datasheet. See Create a Revision.

Edit Displays the Revision Entry window, used to edit the currently selected
revision. See Edit a Revision.

Note: Double-clicking on any existing Revision will also open the


Revision Entry window.

Delete Used to delete the currently selected revision.

Note: Pressing the <Delete> key will also delete the currently selected
revision.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Notes Tab

Used to add notes regarding the datasheet.

User Fields Tab

Used to add data in user-defined fields.

Others Tab

Used to enter additional details of the datasheet.


When all required details have been entered, click Save to save the new datasheet and exit
the window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

8.4 Assign Tags To Datasheets


Tags can be assigned to single datasheets when those datasheets are being defined. A
facility is also provided to assign tags to batches of datasheets.
Continue at:
• Assign Tags from the Add New Datasheet or Datasheet Information Window
• Batch Assign Multiple Tags to Datasheets

8.4.1 Assign Tags from the Add New Datasheet or Datasheet Information
Window
In Tags tab of the Add a New Datasheet window (see Add New Datasheets) or the
Datasheet Information window (see Edit Datasheet Information), either select an empty
tag number record and click Assign or double-click on an empty tag number record.
The Select Tag(s) to Assign to Datasheet window is then displayed:

The Select Tag(s) to Assign to Datasheet window shows all the tags that have not yet
been assigned to any datasheet.
The tags list can be filtered to enable easier access to tags using standard grid facilities, and
the Match Operating Principle checkbox.
When the Match Operating Principle checkbox is checked, only those tags with the same
Operating Principle as the Catalogue type of the datasheet are listed. When the Match
Operating Principle checkbox is not checked all tags from the Instrument List which have
any operating principle that is not blank (empty) are shown.

Note: Prior to creating datasheets it is recommended that users assign an operating


principle to all tags that require a datasheet in the Instrument List as only those tags
will appear in this window for assignment to a datasheet.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Assign a Tag to the current Datasheet


Double-click on a Tag Number to assign the selected tag to the current datasheet. Repeat
the double-click selection to assign more than one tag (if the current datasheet has multiple
tags that are yet to be assigned).

Note: The selected tag(s) are allocated to the next available spare tag position on the
datasheet. To change tag positions then the tags can be dragged into a new position
using the Edit Datasheet Information window.

Alternatively, click the Select checkbox for each to be assigned, then click the Select
button.

Remove a Tag from the Current Datasheet


Select a tag and click Un-Assign.

Reassign a Tag Position in the Current Datasheet


Drag and drop one tag onto the position of another to exchange their positions. This will
automatically move all tag data on the corresponding datasheet to the new column and/or
row positions next time the datasheet is updated.

8.4.2 Batch Assign Multiple Tags to Datasheets


Electrical Engineer enables users to batch assign multiple tags to datasheets and so create
multiple datasheets. Each Batch assignment must be for the same datasheet form type.
Datasheet form types are defined in the Datasheet Catalogue Grid.
With the Datasheets List open, click Batch Assign Tags in the Tools section of the List
Tools - Datasheets tab.
The Batch Assign Tags to Datasheet window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

The Batch Assign Tags to Datasheet window shows all the tags that have not yet been
assigned to any datasheet.
To assign multiple tags to a datasheet type, click the Select checkbox for each tag to be
assigned.
The selected tags are added to the Tag No list to the right of the main grid.

Note: Use the column filters and the Select All button to select multiple tag numbers.

Or drag each equipment record to the Tag No list (or drag all selected records).

Note: Initiate a drag by selecting the white space to left of each record. If multiple Tag
records are selected the drag method will assign all the selected tags.

To remove a tag from the Tag No list select it, then press the <Del> (Delete) key.

To Create Datasheets for all the Tags


Select a Catalogue Form type from the Catalogue Form list.
Specify the document naming rules by selecting or entering data for at least one of the
following options:
• enter a document number prefix (e.g. '07-DS-') in the Prefix field.
• specify the use of the Tag Number as part of the document number by checking the
Use Tag Number checkbox.
• specify a numeric value to append to the above values in the Numeric Identifier field,
and whether the numeric value is to be auto-incremented for each datasheet (e.g.
'4001') by checking the adjacent Increment checkbox.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

• specify a sheet number in the Sheet Number field and whether this to be auto-
incremented for each datasheet by checking the adjacent Increment checkbox.
Click Create.
Engineer will then create new datasheets in the Datasheet List naming each datasheet
document as specified by the above settings.

8.5 Edit Datasheet Information


For instructions on how to edit the content of a datasheet, refer to View/Edit Equipment
Datasheets.
To edit general datasheet information, select the datasheet from the Datasheets List, and
click Edit in the Records section of the Home tab. The Datasheet Information window is
then displayed:

The window is basically the same as the second “page” of the Add a New Datasheet and
Add Datasheet for: windows (refer to Add New Datasheets) except as follows:

Last Edit Field


The Last Edit field displays the date and time when the datasheet data was last edited.The
user name of the individual that performed the edit is displayed in a tool-tip when the mouse
cursor is hovered over the field. Click the button in the field to display the Audit Manager,
which will display a list of all the changes to the datasheet data.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

8.6 Delete Datasheet Options


To delete datasheets, select the datasheets in the Datasheets List and click Delete in the
Records section of the Home tab.
If a selected datasheet has been added to a document list (see Document List), it cannot be
deleted, and a message is displayed to inform the user of this.
Otherwise, the following window is then displayed:

Delete from List Only Deletes the datasheet records from Datasheet List, but
does not delete the Excel spreadsheets, if they exist.

Delete Datasheet File Only Deletes any existing Excel spreadsheets, but does not
delete the datasheet records in the Datasheet List.

Delete from List and Deletes both the spreadsheet files and removes the
Datasheet File datasheet records from Datasheet List.

Click Delete to continue or Cancel to exit.

8.7 Print Datasheets


Selected datasheets can be printed in batch mode from the Datasheets List, as follows:
• Select the datasheet records to be printed.
• Select the number of copies to be printed from the Number of Copies in the Printing
section of the List Tools - Datasheets tab.
• Select the required the print option from the Printing section of the List Tools -
Datasheets tab:

Print Sends the latest issue of the selected datasheets to the


default printer.

Print with Changes Sends the latest issue of the selected datasheets to the
default printer. The printed copy is printed with the changes
made from the previous issue highlighted. Highlighted
changes are as specified by the Datasheet Change
Preferences window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Print to PDF Prints the latest issue of the selected datasheets to a PDF file
which is stored in the folder designated in the Project Data
window.

Print to PDF Changes Prints the latest issue of the selected datasheets to a PDF file
which is stored in the folder designated in the Project Data
window. The PDF file highlights the changes made from the
previous issue. Highlighted changes are as specified by the
Datasheet Change Preferences window.

Note: The spreadsheet file must already exist to be printed. The Update facility (see
Datasheets List - List Tools Options) can be used on multiple datasheets to create/
update the datasheet spreadsheet file from the database. This ensures the latest
database information will be used.

Note: Printing is handled by Microsoft Excel. To print datasheets Microsoft Excel must be
installed on the workstation.

8.8 Datasheet Revisions


Revisions can be assigned to datasheets. Each revision has a unique identifier, and is
assigned a date. Other details such as a description and details of the individuals that
created, checked and approved the revision may also be specified.
Continue at:
• Create a Revision
• Edit a Revision
• Viewing and Editing Multiple Datasheet Revisions

8.8.1 Create a Revision


To create a revision for a datasheet:
• In the Datasheet Information / Add a New Datasheet / Add Datasheet for: window
for the datasheet (see Add New Datasheets or Edit Datasheet Information), click Add
on the Revisions tab.
• Or, select the datasheet in the Datasheet List and click Add Revision in the Actions
section of the List Tools - Datasheets tab.
To create a revision for multiple datasheets:
• Select the datasheets in the Datasheet List and click Add Revision in the Actions
section of the List Tools - Datasheets tab.
When revisions are added using this method the details entered in Revision Entry
window are assigned to all selected datasheets.
The Revision Entry window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Complete the fields as required.

Note: The text field descriptions displayed are dependant on the settings made in the
Options window. For further information refer to Options.

When creating a new revision, leaving the Revision No field blank will cause
Instrumentation to use the next revision number. e.g. if the current revision is "A", then the
next is "B" or if current revision is "2", then the next is "3" etc.
The Date field defaults to the current date, but a different date may be selected if required.
The Description field contains a list of all previously created revision descriptions. Add a
new description by entering any required description. Any new descriptions will be available
for future revision entries.

8.8.2 Edit a Revision


To edit the current revision of a datasheet:
• In the Datasheet Information / Add a New Datasheet / Add Datasheet for: window
for the datasheet (see Add New Datasheets or Edit Datasheet Information), select the
revision on the Revisions tab and click Edit.
• Or, select the datasheet in the Datasheet List and click Edit Revision in the Actions
section of the List Tools - Datasheets tab.
To edit the current revisions for multiple datasheets:
• Select the datasheets in the Datasheet List and click Edit Revision in the Actions
section of the List Tools - Datasheets tab.
When revisions are edited using this method the details entered in Revision Entry
window are assigned to all selected datasheets.
The Revision Entry window is then displayed. Edit the details as required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

8.8.3 Viewing and Editing Multiple Datasheet Revisions


To view a list of all revisions of all datasheets in the Datasheet List, click Revisions in the
Actions section of the List Tools - Datasheets tab. The Revisions window is displayed:

To view the revisions for a single datasheet, click on the + icon next to its listing.
To view revisions for all reports, click Show All Revs.

8.9 Datasheet Issues


To issue a datasheet:
• Open the datasheet (see View/Edit Equipment Datasheets) and click Issue.
• Or, select the datasheet in the Datasheet List and click Issue in the Actions section of
the List Tools - Datasheets tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:23 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

A progress dialog for the issue is displayed:

If the report has already been issued at the current revision, or has had no revisions created
for it, a message window is displayed to inform that the user that a new revision must be
created before issuing.

Click Cancel to cancel the issue or OK to create a new revision. Refer to Datasheet
Revisions for further information on creating a new revision.
Once the revision has been created, or if neither of the above conditions apply, the
datasheet revision is issued, and opened in Microsoft Excel.
To view a list of previous issue, see View a List of Previous Issues.

8.9.1 View a List of Previous Issues


AVEVA Electrical saves all previous Issues of datasheets which enables users to access
any previous issued datasheets for information etc.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:24 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

To see previous issues:


• Click Open Issues for Selected or Open Issues for All as required, accessible from
the drop-down menu displayed by clicking the button next to the Issue button on the
Datasheet window (see View/Edit Equipment Datasheets).

• Or, click Open Issues for Selected or Open Issues for All as required in the Actions
section of the List Tools - Datasheets tab.
The Issues window is then displayed:

Command Buttons:

Open Open the selected issue in Excel.

Delete Deletes the selected issue.

Print Prints the selected issue(s).

Find Displays the Find window, used to search for any text string located
anywhere within the grid.

Filter Displays up window used to define Advanced Grid Filters for the grid.

Refresh Updates entire grid with latest database information (useful in multi-user
project environments).

Close Closes the window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:25 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

8.10 Import Datasheets from Excel


Engineer can import Excel spreadsheets, for example those from vendors or from other
departments (e.g Process department). Data imported from spreadsheets will replace data
on an individual cell/field basis. All differences between current and data to be imported is
highlighted to users, enabling acceptance or rejection of the data, again on a field by field
basis.

8.10.1 Import Datasheets


To import a datasheet into Engineer the following is mandatory:
• The Excel spreadsheet must be identical in layout to a Datasheet Catalogue definition
previously defined in Datasheets (ideally it would be exported from the AVEVA
Instrumentation project using the Export to Excel option on the Manage tab).
• The Excel spreadsheet file name (.xls) must be identical to a previously created
datasheet in the Datasheet List (the datasheet file name is in the format 'DocNo-Sheet'
- that is: the document number + '-' + Sheet Number).
• The Excel spreadsheet file must reside on an accessible disk (either on a network,
local hard disk or removable drive). Furthermore, if multiple spreadsheet files are to be
imported it is recommended that they all reside in same directory/folder.
Note: The easiest way to satisfy the above criteria is to create the datasheet using the
AVEVA Electrical Engineer application (this will satisfy the first two criteria above),
then copy the created Excel spreadsheet to a directory for editing in Excel.

To import an Excel datasheet, with the Datasheets List open, click From Excel in the
Import section of the Manage tab.
The Datasheet(s) Import window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:26 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Note: The entry in the Datasheet folder field defaults to the folder selected during the last
import.

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

Click the button to the right of the Datasheet Folder field to display the Browse for Folder
window.

Select the folder that holds the Excel spreadsheets and click OK. The Datasheet(s) Import
window refreshes and displays a list of valid spreadsheets in the selected folder.

Note: In this context a valid datasheet spreadsheet means the Excel spreadsheet file name
(.xls) must be identical to a previously created datasheet in the Datasheet List.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:27 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

To select a spreadsheet to import, select the Import checkbox (on left of each Datasheet
filename) then click Import. To import all spreadsheets check the Select All checkbox
above the list then click Import.
Clicking Import processes each selected spreadsheet and displays a detailed list of
proposed changes, for example differences between data in the spreadsheets and the
current database.
To cancel without importing click Cancel.

8.10.2 Accept Changes


For each Excel spreadsheet selected for import, a detailed list of differences is shown.

Note: The list in this window shows all values that are different in the imported Excel
spreadsheet and the AVEVA Electrical database. Values that are the same are not
listed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:28 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Check the Accept checkbox of those changes that are to be imported.


To accept all changes, click on the Accept All checkbox. If necessary, users can then scroll
through the list of all field values and check or uncheck the Accept checkboxes on a field by
field basis.

Note: The import is done on a per tag basis. The tag value is shown in parentheses after
the field name.

Tag numbers are never imported. The data from each imported datasheet is applied to each
tag that has already been assigned to each datasheet, refer to Assign Tags To Datasheets
for further information.
To import the checked values click Import.
To cancel any import for the current Excel spreadsheet click Cancel.
For both of the above commands, if multiple files are selected for import Electrical Engineer
will display the next files 'Delta Values' window. If multiple files have been selected for
import, users can stop all imports by clicking the Stop Importing command.

8.11 Datasheet Publishing


Datasheets in the Datasheet List can be published, i.e. their Excel files saved to a pre-
defined location.
PDF versions of the published datasheets may also be produced.
The folder that datasheets are published to, whether or not PDF versions of the published
files are to be produced, and other options, are specified using the Publishing Configuration
window.

8.11.1 Publishing Configuration


Before datasheets can be published, a number of configuration options must be specified.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:29 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Select Setup > Export to External System Configuration from the Project tab. The
Export to External System Configuration window is then displayed:

In the Publishing folder field, enter the folder into which datasheets are to be published, or
click … and browse for it.
If PDF versions of published files are to be generated using Excel, in addition to the
published Excel files, check Publish as PDF.
If PDF versions of published files are to be generated using a PDF generator other than the
Excel PDF writer, in the Executable to handle publishing field, enter the name and
location of the executable file that will handle the publishing, or click … and browse for it. If
Publish as PDF is checked, this setting will be ignored.
For each published datasheet, an XML file containing selected datasheet data is also
produced in the publishing folder. To select the datasheet data that the XML file will include,
click Add. A blank row is added to the area below this button. From the drop down list in this
row, select the required datasheet data. Repeat for each type of datasheet data required.
To delete a row, select it and click Delete. A message will be displayed requesting that the
deletion be confirmed. Click Yes.
If no fields are selected, the XML files are not generated.
To save configuration changes and exit the window, click Save.
To exit the window without saving any changes, click Cancel.

8.11.2 Publish Datasheets


To publish datasheets, select them in the grid and click To External System in the Export
section of the List Tools - Datasheets tab. Multiple datasheets can be selected and
published.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:30 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

The datasheets will then be published to the publishing folder along with (optionally) the
PDF and XML data files.
If PDF versions of the datasheets are to be generated using a PDF generator other than
Excel, this is opened and used to generate the PDFs instead.
Any errors that occur during the publishing process are reported in the Error Summary
window.

Click Continue to carry on with the procedure or Cancel to stop it.

8.12 Merge Datasheets into a Single Document


Multiple datasheets can be merged into a single document which can then be published.
Documents created by merging datasheets are listed in the Documents List grid. Refer to
Document List for further information.
Datasheets are merged using the Document Information window, which is accessible from
the Datasheets and Documents List grids.
To merge datasheets from the Datasheets grid, select the datasheets to be merged and
click To Document List in the Export section of the List Tools - Datasheets tab. The
Document Information window is then displayed.
To merge datasheets from the Document List grid, click New to display the Document
Information window.
To change the datasheets assigned to an existing document, select the document from the
Document List grid and click Edit to display the Document Information window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:31 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

If the Document Information window is accessed from the Datasheets grid, the
datasheets that were selected are listed in the lower half of the window on the Main tab.
These can be removed and further datasheets can be added.
If the Document Information window is accessed by clicking New on the Document List
grid, no datasheets are listed. Add datasheets as described next.
If the Document Information window is accessed by clicking Edit on the Document List
grid, the datasheets previously assigned to the document are listed. Add or remove
datasheets as required.

8.12.1 Assign Datasheets to the Document


To assign a datasheet to the document, click Assign DataSheet to display the Select
Datasheets window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:32 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

To select a datasheet, either double-click on it, or highlight it and click Select. The
datasheet is then added to the list in the Document Information window.

8.12.2 Unassign Datasheets from the Document


To unassign a datasheet from the document, click on the datasheet in the list in the
Document Information window and click UnAssign DataSheet. The selected datasheet is
then removed from the list and from the document.

8.12.3 Enter Basic Document Details


Basic document details are entered in the upper half of the Main tab.
Enter the number of the document in the Document Number field. The filename and path
of the document is displayed in the Document Publishing File field once the document is
saved.

Note: The filename will be the same as the document name.

Select the file type from the Format list, PDF, Excel or Zip. The Zip format is a collection of
Excel files, one for each document sheet, in a .ZIP file. The PDF and Excel formats are
single, multi-page files that include all the document sheets.
To select the datasheet that will be used as the front page for the document, click the Select
button next to the Front Sheet field. The DataSheet Catalogue window is displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:33 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

The Datasheet Catalogue window lists all those datasheets from the catalogue of the Front
Sheet type. To create a new front sheet datasheet, click New. The Catalogue Information
window is then displayed, in which details of the new datasheet can be entered. Refer to
Add a New Datasheet Definition for details.
To select a datasheet, either double-click on it, or highlight it and click Select. Once a front
sheet datasheet is selected, it is displayed in the Front Sheet field. Click the adjacent Clear
button to de-select it and clear the field.
To generate an index sheet for the document, click Create next to the Index Sheet field. A
standard index sheet is then automatically generated for the document and is displayed in
the Index Sheet field. The Create button is then replaced by a View button. Click View to
open the index sheet in the Custom Report window from which it can be edited if required.
Refer to Report Manager for details. Click the adjacent Clear button to delete the index
sheet.
To select the datasheet that will be used as the summary page for the document, click the
Select button next to the Summary Sheet field to display the Datasheet Catalogue
window. To create a new Summary Sheet datasheet, click New. The Catalogue
Information window is then displayed, in which details of the new datasheet can be
entered. Refer to Add a New Datasheet Definition for details. Follow the same procedure as
for front sheets, as described above.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:34 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

To select a datasheet, either double-click on it, or highlight it and click Select. Once a
summary sheet datasheet is selected, it is displayed in the Summary Sheet field. Click the
adjacent Clear button to de-select it and clear the field.

Revisions
Document revisions are added, edited and deleted using the Revisions tab.

Note: Revisions can also be added, edited and deleted from the Document List window.

To add a new revision, click Add to display the Revision Entry window.

Complete the fields as required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:35 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Note: The text field descriptions displayed are dependant on the settings made in the
Options window. For further information refer to Options.

When creating a new revision, leaving the Revision No field blank will cause
Instrumentation to use the next revision number. e.g. if the current revision is "A", then the
next is "B" or if current revision is "2", then the next is "3" etc.
The Date field defaults to the current date, but a different date may be selected if required.
The Description field contains a list of all previously created revision descriptions. Add a
new description by entering any required description. Any new descriptions will be available
for future revision entries.
Once a revision is created it is listed in the Revisions tab.
To edit a revision, select it and click Edit to display the Revision Entry window. Change the
revision details as required and click Save.
To delete a revision, select it and click Delete. The revision is then deleted.

Note: New revisions, changes to revisions and deletions of revisions are not saved to the
project database until the Save button is clicked.

Title
Enter the document title text in the fields in the Title tab.

User Fields
Enter any user/project specific text in the fields in the User Fields tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:36 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Notes
Enter any notes or remarks in the fields in the Notes tab.

8.12.4 Save and Publish the Document


To save the document and exit the Document Information window, click Save.
The document is then published in accordance with the settings specified on the Main tab.
A Progress window displays the progress of the procedure.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:37 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Note: Documents can also be published from the Document List window. See Document
List.

To exit the Document Information window without saving or publishing, click Cancel.

8.13 Document List


Multiple datasheets can be merged into a single document which can then be published.
Refer to Merge Datasheets into a Single Document.
These documents are listed the Document List grid, from where they can be viewed, edited
and published. New documents can also be created from this grid.
To open the Document List, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the Home
tab.
Select Document List from the list of grids that is then displayed. The Document List grid is
then displayed:

Refer to Working with the Data Grid for information on the grid controls including selecting a
document record, and sorting and filtering the grid data.
Document details cannot be edited directly in the grid. They are edited using the Document
Information window. Refer to Merge Datasheets into a Single Document for details.

Open a Published Document


Once a document has been published, it may be opened by clicking on the button that is
displayed in the Publishing Path field when the mouse cursor is hovered over it.
If the document has not been published, a message is displayed informing the use of this
when the button is clicked.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:38 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Documents List - List Tools Options


The following options are located on the List Tools - Document List tab:

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Actions Section

Update Publishes the selected document. Refer to Publish Documents.

Revisions Displays a list of all documents and their revisions. Refer to View
and Edit Multiple Document Revisions.

Add Revision Displays a window for adding a new document revision. If multiple
documents are selected, a new revision may be added to each of
these. Refer to Add and Edit Revisions for Single Documents and
Add Revisions to Multiple Documents.

Edit Revision Displays a window for editing the most recent revision of document.
Refer to Add and Edit Revisions for Single Documents.

Refresh Sheet/ Updates the grid with the current sheet/page counts of the listed
Page Count documents.

8.13.1 Delete Documents


To delete documents, select the documents from the Document List and click Delete in the
Records section of the Home tab. The Delete Document? window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:39 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Select the required deletion option:

Delete from List Only Deletes the documents from the Document List but does not
delete any published document files.

Delete Document Only Deletes published files but does not delete the documents
from the list.

Delete from List and Delete the documents from the Document List and delete
Document any published files.

Click Delete to proceed with the selected type of deletion.


Click Cancel to cancel the deletion.

8.13.2 Publish Documents


To publish documents, select them in the Document List grid and click Update on the List
Tools - Document List tab.
A message is then displayed to warn that files previously published from the document(s)
may be overwritten. Click Yes to proceed with the publishing or No to cancel.
If Yes is clicked, the documents are then published in accordance with the settings specified
on the Main tab of the Document Information window (see Merge Datasheets into a Single
Document). A Progress window displays the progress of the procedure for each selected
document.

8.13.3 Document Revisions

View and Edit Multiple Document Revisions


To view a list of all revisions of all documents in the Document List, click Update on the List
Tools - Document List tab. The Revisions window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:40 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

To view the revisions for a single drawing, click on the + icon next to its listing.
To view revisions for all drawings, click Show All Revs.
To edit an existing revision click Edit. The Multi-Field Edit (Bulk Edit) window is displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:41 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

• To edit a revision field, check the appropriate checkbox and enter the new value.
• Click Select all to select all fields for editing.
• Click Copy first record's data to copy the values for the revision first selected in the
Revision window into the fields.
• Once the required changes have been entered, click Save.
To add a new revision, click New. The Revision Entry window (described below) is then
displayed. Enter the required details and click Save.
To delete a revision, select the revision and click Delete. A message will then be displayed
requesting that the deletion be confirmed. Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel.

Add and Edit Revisions for Single Documents


To add a new revision for a single document from the Document List, click Add Revision on
the List Tools - Document List tab.

Note: Revisions can also be added and edited using the Revisions tab of the Document
Information dialog. Refer to Enter Basic Document Details for details.

The Revision Entry window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:42 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Complete the fields as required.

Note: The text field descriptions displayed are dependant on the settings made in the
Preferences window. For further information refer to Options.

When creating a new revision, leaving the Revision No field blank will cause
Instrumentation to use the next revision number. e.g. if the current revision is "A", then the
next is "B" or if current revision is "2", then the next is "3" etc.
The Date field defaults to the current date, but a different date may be selected if required.
The Description field contains a list of all previously created revision descriptions. Add a
new description by entering any required description. Any new descriptions will be available
for future revision entries.
Once a revision is created it is listed in the Revisions tab of the Document Information
window. Refer to Enter Basic Document Details for details.
To edit a revision, select it and click Edit Revision on the List Tools - Document List tab.
The Revision Entry window is then displayed. Change the revision details as required and
click Save.

Add Revisions to Multiple Documents


To add a new revision to multiple documents, select the documents from the Document List
then click Add Revision on the List Tools - Document List tab.
The Revision Entry window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:43 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Edit the revision details are described above.


When revision entries are added using this method the Revision Entry window entries are
assigned to all selected datasheets.

8.14 Datasheet Form Catalogue


All AVEVA Electrical Engineer datasheets are based on user-definable Excel Worksheets
that are used as templates for each datasheet.
The Datasheet Catalogue contains all datasheet forms and their attributes, including:
• Name of datasheet type and its equipment type.
• Layout/Design (i.e. the name of Excel spreadsheet file).
• Database table(s) used to store data within the AVEVA Electrical database.
• Field definitions (one per spreadsheet cell is required).
• Spreadsheet cell to database field mappings (using AVEVA Electrical DataLinks).
The Catalogue Datasheet definition is complete when each cell in the datasheet is mapped
to an AVEVA Electrical database field. Then when a project datasheet uses the Catalogue
Datasheet all data entered into each datasheet cell can be saved to the mapped database
field and any data changed in the database can be updated back to each datasheet cell.

Suggested Workflow to create a new Catalogue Datasheet Template


When a project datasheet is created, it is configured in accordance with a selected
catalogue datasheet. The data mappings will populate the cells of the project datasheet with
the required data from the project datasheet, both generic project data, and data specific to
the item that is the subject of the datasheet. In turn, changes to data in the datasheet will
automatically update the equivalent data in the database.

Suggested Workflow to create a new Catalogue Datasheet Template


The Excel spreadsheet layout must first be created in Microsoft Excel (97 to 2010) prior to
adding the new template form to the AVEVA Electrical Datasheets Catalogue. The fastest
ways to do this are to copy and modify an existing Datasheet spreadsheet provided with
Electrical Engineer, or to copy and modify one previously created for the project.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:44 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

In completing the layout in Excel, pay attention to fonts, justification and merged cells to
complete the ideal form for a particular instrument type. All physical attributes of the form
including fonts, cell sizing/merging, cell formatting (bold, italics and justification etc.), print
setup, margins, colours, shading etc. are controlled by this Excel template. There is no
control of formatting/layout within AVEVA Electrical, which just transfers data between the
spreadsheet cells and the AVEVA Electrical database.
Once new spreadsheet layout is complete, register it in the Datasheet Catalogue Grid (see
Add a New Datasheet Definition).
Once the new Catalogue Datasheet template is registered, open this datasheet template in
design mode from the Datasheet Catalogue Grid List and define map the datasheet cells to
the appropriate database fields (see Map Database Fields to Datasheet Cells). This step
enables AVEVA Electrical to update each cell with the required database data (and vice
versa).

Note: AVEVA Electrical can only save data to/from the project database/Excel workbook if
a worksheet cell is mapped to a database field. Any other data will not be saved.

Finally, while in the design mode, assign picklists cells for more efficient data entry (see
Assign a PickList to a Cell).
When this is completed, the new datasheet template is then ready for use on the project.

8.14.1 Datasheet Catalogue Grid


The Datasheet Catalogue grid is used to create new datasheet form definitions and to edit
existing definitions and templates.
To open the Datasheet Catalogue grid, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of
the Home tab.
Select Datasheets under the Catalogues heading from the list of grids that is then
displayed. The Datasheet Catalogue grid is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:45 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

The Datasheets Catalogue grid shows information for each datasheet form definition.

Datasheet Catalogue - List Tools Options


The following options are located on the List Tools - Datasheet Catalogue tab:

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Actions Section

Open Opens the selected datasheet definition for editing. Refer to Map
Database Fields to Datasheet Cells and Assign a PickList to a Cell.

Open In Opens the selected datasheet template in Excel.


Excel

Printing Section

Number of Used to select the number of copies to be printed using the Print Forms
Copies option.

Print Forms Prints selected empty (blank) Catalogue templates (the datasheet Excel
spreadsheet template).

8.14.2 Add a New Datasheet Definition


The Excel spreadsheet layout must first be created in Microsoft Excel (97 to 2010) prior to
adding the new template form to the AVEVA Electrical Datasheets Catalogue. The fastest
ways to do this are to copy and modify an existing Datasheet spreadsheet provided with
Electrical Engineer, or to copy and modify one previously created for the project.
To add a new Datasheet definition to the project catalogue, with the Datasheet Catalogue
Grid grid open, click New in the Records section of the Home tab.
The Select Catalogue Type window in then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:46 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Select the type of datasheet definition to be created and click OK. The Catalogue
Information window is then displayed.

The version of the Catalogue Information window displayed above is that displayed if the
selected datasheet definition type was "DataSheet". If the selected type was Front Sheet or
Summary Sheet, a different version is displayed:

Note: The ... button at the end of the File Name field can be used to locate any existing
spreadsheet file and to copy the selected file to the project datasheet template folder.
Any Excel file can be used, including Excel workbooks with multiple worksheets.

The template folder for the current project is listed on the Project Data window, accessed
by selecting Edit Project on the Project tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:47 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

To Copy an Existing Form Definition


A new form definition can be copied from any other form in the current project or from
another AVEVA Electrical project.
To copy an existing form select the Copy Definition button to display the Copy an Existing
Datasheet form definition window, used to select an existing datasheet form. Refer to
Copy Existing Datasheet Definition for details.

Manually Create a New Form Definition


1. Enter a name for the new form in the Form Name field.
2. Enter a useful Description for the new form.
3. The Max No. of Plant Connections field is not relevant to AVEVA Electrical.
4. Enter the Number of Tags that will be detailed on this form.
Note: The Max No. of Plant Connections and Number of Tags fields are not relevant to
Front Sheets and Summary Sheets and are not displayed when they are being
defined.

5. Enter the Excel spreadsheet file name in the File Name field. The file must exist in the
Project Datasheets template directory.
6. Select the file format (.xls or .xlsx).
Note: The ... button at the end of the File Name field may be used to locate any existing
Excel file. The file will then be copied to the template folder for the AVEVA Electrical
project and renamed to match the form name entered in this window.

7. Enter the spreadsheet cell dimensions (number of columns and Rows). These are
used to limit the view of each template to those dimensions. This restricts viewing to
the number of columns and rows entered here.
8. From the Equipment Type list, select the equipment type of items to be specified on
this datasheet. The equipment type is used to automatically match equipment from the
Loads and Supplies lists with the form type definition.
This is not relevant to Front Sheet and Summary Sheet definitions and therefore the
field in question is not displayed.
9. Click Save to save the definition information or Cancel to exit without saving.
Note: The spreadsheets used for form definitions may include checkboxes. However,
checkboxes will not be displayed in the AVEVA Electrical, i.e. in the Datasheet
Design window or the Datasheet viewer window. Checkboxes therefore must be
replaced with a picklist with values of True and False only. Refer to Checkboxes on
Datasheets for details.

8.14.3 Edit Catalogue Datasheets


To edit a new Datasheet definition, select it from the Datasheet Catalogue Grid, and click
Edit in the Records section of the Home tab. The Catalogue Information window is then
displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:48 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Once a catalogue datasheet is saved, the form name cannot be edited.


Refer to Add a New Datasheet Definition for details of how to enter data in this window.

8.14.4 Copy Existing Datasheet Definition


When creating a new catalogue datasheet form definition, users can copy any existing form
definition by clicking the Copy Definition button on the Add a New Datasheet Definition
window.
The Copy an Existing Datasheet form definition window is then displayed.

The window lists the existing Catalogue Datasheet form definition in the project.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:49 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

To copy an existing form definition, double-click on the form record in the window above, or
select it and click Copy.
If required form definitions may be copied from a different project. Click Select a Project.
The Select an AVEVA Electrical Project window is then displayed. Select the required
project from the list of projects listed in this window. The Copy an Existing Datasheet form
definition window then displays the form definition in that project. Select the required form
definition as described above.

Note: AVEVA Electrical also provides facilities to import multiple form types from another
AVEVA Electrical project. Refer to Import Catalogue Datasheets From Other Project
for details.

After selecting the form type, the window is closed and the Catalogue Information window
is displayed again. When that window is saved, the existing form definition is copied,
including the Excel file and field to cell mappings (DataLinks).

8.14.5 Map Database Fields to Datasheet Cells


The Datasheet Design window is used to add or modify the database field to workbook/
worksheet cell mappings for each form definition in the Datasheet Catalogue.
To display the window, elect the form definition from the Datasheet Catalogue Grid and click
the Open option in the List Tools - Datasheet Catalogue tab.

The window shows the datasheet form layout as previously created using Microsoft Excel.
There are two main areas on this window:

Datasheet Layout
The left-hand area contains the spreadsheet layout and shows each cell as previously
defined in Microsoft Excel. The layout cannot be changed here.This must be done using
Microsoft Excel. The grey coloured cells indicate which cells have been mapped (or linked)
to a database field.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:50 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Note: To see which DataLink (field) is mapped to a particular cell click in the cell and the list
view will highlight the DataLink.in the DataLinks List View (see below). The feature
works only when the Used checkbox is checked in the DataLinks List View.

DataLinks List View


The right area contains a list of all DataLinks (database fields) previously defined in AVEVA
Electrical. This also contains system fields that are predefined in Datasheets to enable
access to equipment and project data.

Note: New properties and the fields to be used to represent them can be user-defined for
equipment. Refer to Add New Property Definition. See also the New Properties
button (described below).

Note: The Print button in this window prints the datasheet form with Datalink mappings.

When this window is first displayed, the DataLinks List view shows used DataLinks only.

Note: Sort the lists by clicking on the column header (e.g. In figure above: “Table” sorts by
Table name, “Field” sorts by field name, “Tag” sorts by tag name etc.).

Whether used or unused DataLinks are displayed is controlled by the Used checkbox. To
view only unused DataLinks, uncheck the Used checkbox. To display both used and
unused DataLinks, clear the Used/Unused filter by clicking on the “clear filter criteria” button
next to the Used checkbox.

Map a DataLink to a Cell


Drag the required DataLink from the Fields list to the desired cell and drop the DataLink onto
the cell. If the mapping is successful the cell will become grey.

Note: If the DataLink is for the first (Tag1) of a multiple tag datasheet then the dragging and
dropping of a Tag1 field will auto-assign all other DataLinks of the same field name if
both Tag1 TagNo and Tag2 TagNo fields are already mapped.
For example, if the user drags PressureMax for Tag1, if the Automatic Copy for
multiple Tags checkbox (at top of window - only displayed for form definitions with
multiple tags) is checked, then Engineer will attempt to assign DataLinks for
PressureMax to Tags 2, 3 and 4 also, using the row/column offset between Tag1 and
Tag2 to offset the other fields. The feature makes assigning mappings for multi tag
datasheets far more efficient.

Note: It is recommended that the DataLink list view is sorted by Field to more easily identify
the fields being mapped.

Note: If a picklist is assigned to a field in the Grid Manager (see the Common Functionality
User Guide for details), the picklist will not automatically be available for that field
when mapped to a cell in a datasheet. The pick-list must still be assigned to the cell
using the facilities described below (see Assign a PickList to a Cell).

Unmap or Unassign a Mapped Cell


Right-click on the cell to display a menu and select the Delete DataLink option.

Note: Multiple cells or ranges can be selected and multiple Datalinks deleted from using
this option (hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple cells).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:51 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Command Buttons

Save Saves the mappings to the database.

Print Opens the datasheet excel file in a print preview window with all the
mapped field names populated in their respective cells.

Zoom Zooms the Datasheet Layout area according to the value selected

from drop down. Use the buttons to decrement or increment


the zoom by 10%.

New Opens a sub-menu with the following options:


Properties
New Equipment Data Property
New Process Data Property
Auto Create Properties
The first two options open the Property Definition window for
creating a new Equipment or Process data property as appropriate.
Refer to Add New Property Definition for details.
The Auto Create Properties option opens the Auto Create
Properties window, used to create multiple new properties with
attributes derived from headings on the datasheet. Refer to Auto
Create Properties for details.

Close Closes the window and confirms to save any changes made.

Once saved, the new or modified Catalogue Form is ready to be used on the project. It is
recommended that the mappings be tested thoroughly prior to use on a project.

Note: Users should not modify these cell/field mappings for a datasheet type at the same
time other users are accessing datasheets of the same Catalogue type.

8.14.6 Assign a PickList to a Cell


Once a PickList has been defined (refer to Using PickLists) it can be assigned to cells within
the datasheet for use during data entry.
While in the Datasheet Design window, right-click on any cell that has already been
mapped to a database field to display a pop-up menu:

Select the Add Picklist option, then select the PickList name from the sub-menu.
To define new PickLists select Add Picklist > Add New PickList and in the resulting text
box enter the name of new picklist to be added, then press enter (to define new items or
modify existing items in a PickList refer to Using PickLists).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:52 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

To delete an existing picklist select Delete Picklist from the pop up menu.
To edit the values in an existing picklist select the Edit Pick List Values from the menu.
The PickList edit window will be displayed, enabling additional values to be added, edited or
changed in the selected PickList.
For example:

Refer to Using PickLists for further information on editing PickLists.

8.14.7 Checkboxes on Datasheets


The spreadsheets used for form definitions may include checkboxes. However, checkboxes
will not be displayed in the AVEVA Electrical, i.e. in the Datasheet Design window or the
Datasheet viewer window (although they will be displayed in any Excel output). Checkboxes
therefore must be replaced with a picklist with values of True and False only.
For how to add a checkbox to an Excel spreadsheet and link it to a cell, refer to the
appropriate Microsoft Excel documentation. The following points should be noted however:
• The background colour of the cell should be set to white in order to hide the AVEVA
Electrical picklist value (i.e. True or False) when opened in Excel.
• The Number format of the linked cells must be set to General.
Create a picklist to be used as a substitute for a checkbox in the normal way (refer to the
AVEVA Electrical Common Functionality User Guide for details). The picklist must be of the
True/False data type.
The picklist must then be assigned to the appropriate property (refer to Property
Definitions), either an existing property or one created for this purpose. The property must
also be of the True/False data type.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:53 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

In the Datasheet Design window, remember to assign the picklist to the checkbox cell (see
Assign a PickList to a Cell) as the picklist will not automatically be available for that field
when mapped to a cell in a datasheet, even the picklist is assigned to that field in the Grid
Manager.

8.14.8 Auto Create Properties


To create multiple new properties with attributes derived from headings on the datasheet,
click New Properties then Auto Create Properties. The Auto Create Properties window
is then displayed:

Click on the datasheet headings from which the attributes of the new properties are to be
based. As each heading is clicked on, default details derived from the heading text are listed
in the window. For example:

The default object type is Equipment. If required, change this to Process Data by selecting
Process_Data from the list of values available in the Object Type fields.
The rest of the default details can either be edited as described below, or in the Property
Definition window accessed or by clicking on the button in the Edit field. Refer to Add New
Property Definition for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:54 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Specify Details of New Properties


If required, change the object type as described above.
The default property names and captions are copies from the selected heading text. Edit
these as required by direct entry into the Property Name and Caption fields.
For properties of the Equipment object type, the default equipment type is taken from that
associated with the datasheet. To change it or associate it with additional equipment types,
click on the button in the appropriate Equip Type field. The Select Equipment Type
window is then displayed:

Select the types of equipment to add the property to by checking the appropriate
checkboxes. Click OK to exit the window. The selected types are then listed in the Equip
Type field.
For properties of the Process_Data object type the Equip Type field is not used.
If a property is of the Process_Data object type, if the new property has units, check the Has
Units checkbox (not used for Equipment property types).
The default data type is Text. Specify a different data type in the Datatype field if required.
To auto-map a new properties to the datasheet cell to the right of the heading from which it
was derived, check the AutoMap checkbox. Check the AutoMap All checkbox to check all
the AutoMap checkboxes.
To remove a property from the window, select it and then click Delete.

Create the New Properties


Click the Create button. The new properties will then be created (and mapped to datasheet
cells for those properties where this option was selected).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:55 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

For properties of the Process_Data type that had their HasUnits checkbox checked, a
property definition for the units of the new property is automatically created at the same
time.
The name of a units property definition will be the name of the new property suffixed with the
units suffix specified in the Please enter a new Units Suffix window accessed from the
Property Definitions window (see Preferences - the default suffix is “Units”). The data type
of units property definitions is text. Neither this or the name may be changed.
A report listing details of the created properties will be displayed:

8.14.9 Import Catalogue Datasheets From Other Project


Catalogue datasheets may be imported from another AVEVA Electrical project in a multi-
project environment.
With the Datasheet Catalogue Grid open, click From Other Project in the Import section of
the Manage tab to display the Select an AVEVA Electrical Project window. Using this
window, select the project from which the catalogue datasheets are to be imported.
After selecting the project, the Catalogue Import window containing a list of all catalogue
datasheets within that project is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:56 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

Click the Select checkbox for those catalogue datasheets that are to be imported. Click
Select All if all are to be imported.
Click Import.
The import then takes place. A progress window is displayed:

If a catalogue datasheet with the same name as one being imported already exists in the
project database, a message is displayed. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:57 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Click Yes to overwrite the datasheet in the target database or No to prevent this.
If a template file with the same file name as one being imported already exists in the project
database, a message is displayed. For example:

Click Yes to overwrite the file in the target database or No to prevent this.
If a datasheet exists in the current database has been based on a catalogue datasheet with
the same name as one being imported, a warning message is displayed:

Such catalogue datasheets will not be imported. Click OK to continue with the import.
AVEVA Electrical will copy the selected catalogue forms from the selected project to the
current project including their DataLinks (Database field/cell mappings). Once the import is
complete, all imported catalogue datasheets are added to the Datasheet Form Catalogue
list.

8.14.10 Deleting a Datasheet Definition


To delete a catalogue datasheet definition, select it from the Datasheet Catalogue Grid and
click Delete in the Records section of the Home tab. Only one definition can be deleted at a
time.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:58 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

If the definition has been used to define a datasheet it cannot be delete and the following
message is displayed:

If the definition has not been used to define a datasheet, the Delete 1 datasheet window is
displayed:

If the definition is to be deleted from the list in the Datasheet Catalogue grid, but its Excel file
is not to be deleted, click Delete from List Only.
If the Excel file of the definition is to be deleted, but the definition is not to be deleted from
the list, click Delete Datasheet File Only.
If the definition is to be delete from the list, and its Excel file is to be delete as well, click
Delete from List And Datasheet File.
After the required option has been selected, click Delete to proceed with the deletion. Click
Cancel to cancel the deletion.

8.15 View Data by Datasheet Form Type


Engineer includes a grid for viewing and editing data for multiple loads and supplies in a grid
format by datasheet form type. For example, users may view all data for all Motor tags. This
enables faster entry with copy and paste functionality and enables users to view data for
similar datasheets and immediately see gaps in data or inconsistent data etc.
The grid window also supports editing of multiple tags from a single multi-editing window
enabling the easy bulk editing of multiple tags.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:59 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

8.15.1 Browse Data By Form Type


To open the Browse Data by Form Type grid, click Select in the Grids and Schedules
section of the Home tab.
Select Browse Data by Form Type from the list of grids that is then displayed. The Browse
Data by Form Type grid is then displayed:

Select a form type from the Datasheet Form Type drop-down menu. The required data is
then displayed in the grid.

Note: The fields in this grid depend on the actual fields mapped to the current Form Type
selected.

Display the datasheet window by clicking on the button that is displayed in the DocNo cell
when the mouse is hovered over the cell. Refer to Datasheet Data Entry for details.
Equipment data may be edited by clicking on the button that appears in the Tag No cell
when the mouse is hovered over the cell. Refer to Edit a Tag in the Loads List and Edit a
Tag in the Supplies List for details.

Note: Any change made to data in this grid is not updated on the respective datasheet until
the datasheet is opened (or updated from the Datasheet List).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:60 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Browse Data by Form Type - List Tool Options

The following options are located on the List Tools - Browse Data by Form Type tab:

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Actions Section

Datasheet Form Type Used to select the required form type, as described above.

Hide\Show Grid Displays the Hide\Show Grid Columns window, enabling a


Columns user to temporarily hide or un-hide columns as required.

Invert Hide\Show Makes the hidden column visible and hides currently visible
Grid Columns columns.

8.15.2 Edit Data


Data for a tag may be displayed in a vertical format, enabling users to view all the field data
more conveniently than in a conventional horizontal grid.
From the Browse Data By Form Type grid, select the tag record and click Edit in the
Records section of the Home tab to display the Editing Data for: window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:61 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Note: The fields in this window depend on the actual fields mapped to the current Form
Type selected in the Browse Data By Form Type grid.

Note: If more than one record is selected from the Browse Data By Form Type grid when
Edit is selected, the Multi Field Edit (Bulk Edit) window is displayed instead. Refer
to Edit Data for Multiple Tags.

8.15.3 Edit Data for Multiple Tags


Data for multiple equipment can be edited at the same time.
In the Browse Data By Form Type grid, select the multiple equipment records, then click
Edit in the Records section of the Home tab. A message is displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:62 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

Click Yes. The Multi Field Edit (Bulk Edit) window is then displayed:

Check the Select checkbox for all columns to be edited.


Enter the new values required in the Value columns.
The Copy first record's Data option will copy the data from first record in selection into the
window ready for editing. The data is not actually copied to the selected tags unless the
Select checkbox is selected and the Save button is clicked.
Click Save to save the changes.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:63 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Datasheets

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:64 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

9 Distribution Diagrams

Distribution diagrams, i.e. Key One Line diagrams and Single Line diagrams, may be
created for equipment in the project.
Users can create Key One Line diagrams for any part of the power distribution system, and
as many as required to help the completion of the design. Equipment added to a Key One
Line diagram can be existing equipment, or new equipment. When new equipment (and
cables) are added to a Key One Line diagram they are added to the project.
Single Line diagrams may be generated for a single supply. They will depict the supplies
loads and it’s own supply where applicable. Single Line diagrams are generated
automatically from existing project data.
Continue at:
• Distribution Diagrams List
• Distribution Diagram Options
• Create New Distribution Diagrams
• View/Edit Distribution Diagrams
• Add and Edit Distribution Diagram Project Symbols

9.1 Distribution Diagrams List


The Distribution Diagrams list is the main window for adding/editing distribution diagrams
(Key One Line diagrams and Single Line diagrams).
All distribution diagrams in the project are shown in the Distribution Diagrams list grid. The
viewable columns, their captions, column size and order are user definable using the Grid
Manager utility.

Note: When diagrams are added to the Distribution Diagrams list, they are not
automatically added to the drawing list in Designer, and vice versa.

Access the Distribution Diagrams List


To open the Distribution Diagrams list, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of
the Home tab.
Select Distribution Diagrams under the Lists heading from the list of grids that is then
displayed. The Distribution Diagrams grid is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Refer to Working with the Data Grid for information on the grid controls including selecting a
record, and sorting and filtering the grid data.
To select it and click Edit on the Home tab.

Distribution Diagrams List - List Tool Options

The following options are located on the List Tools - Distribution Diagrams tab:

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Actions Section

Open Used to open a diagram for viewing, editing and exporting. Refer
to View/Edit Distribution Diagrams for details.

Diagram Section

Options Used access the Options window, in which the symbol set to be
used in diagrams is specified and also aspects of the
appearance and layout of diagrams (colours, line thicknesses,
spacings etc). Refer to Distribution Diagram Options for details.

9.2 Distribution Diagram Options


The Options window is used to specify the symbol set to be used in diagrams, and also
aspects of the appearance and layout of diagrams (colours, line thicknesses, spacings etc).
The access the Options window, click Options in the Diagram section of the List Tools
tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Select the symbol set standard from the Symbol standard list.
Specify busbar, symbol connector, cable, assignment (link), auto-layout, diagram grid and
compartment settings in the fields provided.

Busbar Section

Height Used to set the height of busbars, i.e. the thickness of the line
representing them.

Default Width Used to set the default width of busbars. This may be changed
by users for individual busbars as required.

Colour The colour of busbars.

Compartment The distance of compartments from their busbars.


Distance

Datalinks Margin The margin settings for the datalinks of busbars, i.e. how far
datalinks are placed from the top and left hand side of busbars.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Container The margin settings for the datalinks of busbar containers, i.e.
Datalinks Margin how far datalinks are placed from the top and left hand side of
busbar containers.

Show Container This checkbox controls whether or not the containers around
busbars and their contents are visible.

Show Name This checkbox controls whether or not the names of containers
are displayed.

Symbol Connector Section

Height
The height and width of symbol connector selection boxes.
Width

Cable Section

Datalinks Top The cable data to be displayed above or to the left of cables.

Datalinks Bottom The cable data to be displayed below or to the right of cables.

Colour The colour of created cables.

Assignment (Link) Section

Thickness The thickness of the links between symbols etc (including


cables).

Auto Layout (Approx) Section

Vertical Space The default vertical and horizontal spacing of items used when
drawing layouts are rationalised using the Perform Layout
Horizontal Space option. See Toolbar Options.

Diagram Grid Section

Cell Height The dimensions of the grid squares that may be displayed on
Cell Width distribution diagrams.

Compartment Section

Collapsed Height Individual compartment containers may be collapsed if required.


These settings control the height and width that compartment
Collapsed Width containers collapse to.

Show Container This checkbox controls whether or not compartment containers


are visible.

Internal Link(s) The colour of links within compartments.


Colour

Click Save to save any changes and exit the window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

9.3 Create New Distribution Diagrams


Single Line diagrams may be created from the Load Detail and Supply Detail windows.
Refer to Single Line Check Reports for Loads and Single Line Check Reports for Supplies
for details.
To create a new Key One Line diagram or Single Line diagram from the Distribution
Diagrams List, with the list open click New in the Records section of the Home tab to
display the Distribution Diagram Information window:

Enter the document number of the new diagram and select the type of diagram.
If Single Line is selected, select the supply that the diagram is to be for from the Single
Line for list:

Click Save to create the diagram and add it to the list.


The diagram is then opened in a new window with the document number as its title. In the
case of new Single Line diagrams, an automatically generated diagram is displayed,
consisting of the supply that was selected as the subject of the diagram, its supply or
supplies (where applicable) and its loads etc.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

The diagram is generated using the default symbols specified for the project (see Add and
Edit Distribution Diagram Project Symbols). These may be changed to other (i.e. non-
default) symbols and the layout of the diagram changed (although not the items on it or their
relationships). See View/Edit Distribution Diagrams.
In the case of a new Key One Line diagram, the window displays a blank drawing canvas.
The content of the diagram must now be created by adding supply, load etc symbols to the
diagram and connecting them. When a load or supply symbol is added, a new item of
equipment of the type represented by the equipment is created with default details. See
Create Content of Key One Line Diagrams.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Once the diagram has been created it may be edited in the same way as a Single Line
diagram. See View/Edit Distribution Diagrams.

9.4 View/Edit Distribution Diagrams


To open a Distribution Diagram for viewing and editing, either double-click on it in the
Distribution Diagrams List, or select it in the list and click Open in the Actions section of the
List Tools tab.
The selected diagram is then opened in a new window with the name of the diagram as its
title.
Single Line diagram:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Key One Line diagram:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

If an item that was on the diagram has subsequently been deleted from the database, a
message is displayed to inform the user of this. For example:

The window for a Key One Line diagram includes a section for selecting and adding
symbols to the drawing and facilities for editing details of the equipment and cables created
as a result of this. See Create Content of Key One Line Diagrams for details. The other
features are common and are described below.

View Options
The following facilities are located at the bottom of the window:
• To zoom in and out use the Scale slider, the plus and minus buttons, or hold down the
Ctrl key and move the mouse wheel up (to zoom in) or down (to zoom out).
• If panning is enabled by clicking the Enable Panning button (it is off by default), the
diagram can be navigated around by left-clicking and dragging the mouse in the
required direction.
• Click Scale to Fit to zoom out or in so that contents of the diagram fit the window.
• If the window is in cable mode, toggled by clicking the Cable Mode button, cable
details can be viewed and edited. See Create Content of Key One Line Diagrams.
Applicable to Key One Line diagrams only.
• To display a small window in the bottom-right corner of the main window displaying an
overview of the diagram, click Overview. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Click on a symbol or cable on the drawing to centre the main window on that drawing
element.
Click the button again to close the overview.

Select Drawing Elements


To select a single item of equipment, an incomer, protection device or coupler, left-click on it.
The selected item is surrounded by a green box.
To select multiple items either:
• Select items by left-clicking on their symbols or text and holding down the Shift key.
The first item selected is surrounded by a green box, subsequent items by a blue box.

Note: The symbols and text of MCCs, switchboards, distribution boards and MCC and
switchboard compartment are surrounded by a “container” in the form of a dashed
line. Clicking within a container selects the item. Containers are displayed by default
but can be switched off using the Distribution Diagram Options window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

• Drawing a “box” around the items to be selected by left-clicking on one corner of the
box dragging the cursor, while holding down the left mouse button to the opposite
corner. A pink box is drawn around the selected area. Release the mouse button. All
items fully in the box are then selected and are surrounded by blue boxes.
• Press Ctrl+A to select everything on the drawing. All items are surrounded by blue
boxes.
The supplies and loads of MCCs, distribution boards and switchboards can also be selected
using by right-clicking on them. From the menu that is then displayed select one of the
following options as required:
• Select Supplies
• Select Loads
• Select Supplies & Loads
The loads and/or supplies of the item are then selected and are surrounded by blue boxes.

Move Drawing Elements


To move drawing elements, select them (see above) and drag them to the required location.
Connected cables will stretch etc to maintain connections.

Change Length of Busbars


To change the length of an MCC, distribution board or switchboard busbar click on the
busbar. The busbar is then selected (it will be surrounded with a green outline).
At each end of the busbar a pink square will be displayed. Left-click on the square at end of
the busbar to be lengthened or shortened and drag it left or right until it is the required
length.

Straighten Loads
The cables connected loads to MCCs, distribution boards and switchboards may be drawn
with unnecessary corners in their connecting cables.
To straighten these connections, right-click on the MCC, distribution board or switchboard
and select the Straighten Loads option from the menu that is then displayed.

Toolbar Options

Save Layout Saves changes to the drawing.


In the case of a new drawing opened from the Single Line
Check Report button on the Load Detail or Supply Detail
window, also saves the drawing to the Distribution Diagrams List.

Refresh Manually refreshes the drawing with changes to the layout and to
item details that were not automatically implemented in the
drawing.
In the case of Key One Line diagrams, interconnected equipment
may also be added by refreshing the diagram. See Refresh the
Diagram.

Show Grid Used to toggle the display of the drawing grid on and off (it is on
by default).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Snap to Grid Used to toggle the snapping of drawing elements to the grid on
and off (it is on by default).

Layout Accesses a drop-down menu with these options:

Perform Used to rationalise the layout of the drawing, i.e. so


Layout that equipment is better spaced out, lines do not
cross unnecessarily or have unnecessary corners in
them (see the example below).
A message will be displayed requesting
confirmation that the layout change is to take place.
Click Yes to continue.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Perform Layout change example


Before:

After:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Align Used to align all selected equipment and


Horizontally connectors (i.e. incomers, protection devices)
(Top) horizontally. All selected items are aligned
with the first item selected.

Align Vertically Used to align all selected equipment and


(Left) connectors vertically. All selected items are
aligned with the first item selected.

Align Vertically Used to align all selected connectors only


(Connectors) vertically. All selected items are aligned with
the first item selected.

Compartment Used to update the layout of compartment


Typicals typicals in a diagram to match the required
layout as defined for the typicals (refer to
View and Edit Compartment Typical Graphics
for details).

Enable Panning Toggles panning on and off (it is off by default). When toggling is
on the diagram can be navigated around by left-clicking and
dragging the mouse in the required direction.

Print Used to print the diagram. Opens a standard Print window.

Export Accesses a drop-down menu with these options:

Export to PDF Used to export the diagram to a PDF file.


Opens a standard Save file as window.

Export to Used to export the diagram to a DWG file.


AutoCAD Opens a standard Save file as window.

Cable Mode Toggles cable mode on and off (it is off by default). Applicable to
Key One Line diagrams only. Enables cable details to be viewed
and edited. See Create Content of Key One Line Diagrams.

Size Cables Used to create, size and/or apply wiring rules to the cables
between supplies and loads on a diagram. Applicable to Key
One Line diagrams only. See Create Content of Key One Line
Diagrams.

Close Closes the diagram window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Change Symbols
Right-click on any item of equipment, incomer, protection device or coupler to display the
Change Symbol option. Select this option to displayed the Symbol List window:

The window displays all the different project symbols for the selected item type (see Add
and Edit Distribution Diagram Project Symbols). Select a different symbol either by double-
clicking on it or clicking on it and clicking Select. The window then exits and the symbol on
the drawing is replaced by the selected symbol.

Edit and Delete Items and Cables


For Key One Line diagrams, the right-click menus of items and, when the window is in cable
mode, of cables, include options for viewing, editing and deleting items and cables. See
Create Content of Key One Line Diagrams for details.

Collapse and Expand Compartment Containers


The containers of compartments can be collapsed and expanded on an individual basis.
By default they are expanded. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

To collapse a compartment container, right-click on it and select the Expand/Collapse


option from the menu that is then displayed. The container is then collapsed:

To re-expand a compartment container, select the Expand/Collapse option again.

Drawing Page Right-Click Menus


Right-click on the drawing page (i.e. not on any drawing element) to display the following
options:
• Save Layout: saves the layout.
• Refresh: refreshes the diagram.
• Perform Layout: rationalises the layout of the diagram.
For more information see Toolbar Options.

9.5 Create Content of Key One Line Diagrams


When a new Key One Line diagram is created, the diagram window displays a blank
drawing canvas. The content of the diagram must now be created by adding supply, load etc
symbols to the diagram and connecting them.

Note: Although referred to as a Key One Line diagram, Key One Line diagrams in Electrical
Engineering can be freely edited to show any required arrangement of
interconnected loads and supplied in the project.

When a load or supply symbol is added, a new item of equipment of the type represented by
the equipment is created with default details which can subsequently be edited. Cables
connecting the new equipment are also created automatically and may also be edited from
the window.
Continue at:
• Add New or Existing Equipment
• Manually Connect Symbols
• Refresh the Diagram
• Disconnect Symbols
• Edit Symbols
• Create, Size and Add Wiring to Single or Multiple Cables
• Edit Cables
• Add Distribution Board Circuits
• Delete Symbols

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

9.5.1 Add New or Existing Equipment

Add New Equipment to Drawings


From the Symbols panel on the left-hand side of the window, select the symbol standard to
be used from the Standard list.
The symbols in the standard are then displayed in the Symbols panel. They are divided into
categories, e.g. Supplies, Loads, which can be hidden and revealed by clicking the arrow
down next to a category title.
The plus and minus buttons to either side of the title bar of the panel can be used to expand
and collapse all categories of items with one click.
To add a symbol to the drawing, click on it in the Symbols panel and then drag and drop at
the required position on the drawing page.
When adding a busbars, they must be dropped onto an existing MCC or switchboard
busbar. The new busbar will automatically be added as the next busbar for that equipment.
Note that only loads and supplies may be added. Other symbols are displayed for
information only. Protection device, incomer and coupler symbols are added to the diagram
automatically either when such an item is added using the Supply Details window, or when
load and supply associations are made on the diagram. See below for details.
When a new load or supply is added to the drawing, depending on the setting of the Forced
Tagging for KOL checkbox on the Options window, the equipment may be created with a
default tag, or the Equipment Tag window is displayed (see Manually Add a Tag to the
Loads List for details), in which the user must specify a tag for the equipment.
Details of new equipment an be viewed and edited as explained below.

Add Existing Equipment to Drawings


Existing equipment can be added to a diagram by dragging and dropping it from the Loads
List or the Supplies List onto the diagram (click in the space directly to the left of equipment
in a list where the blue arrow is displayed, to select it for dragging and dropping, not on the
equipment row itself).
The equipment is added to the diagram where it is dropped. At the same time, the supply
and loads of the equipment are also added automatically.
Any further interconnected equipment may be added by refreshing the diagram (see
Refresh the Diagram).

9.5.2 Manually Connect Symbols


Note: In the case of existing equipment added to the diagram for which connections have
already be established, interconnected equipment may be added automatically by
refreshing the diagram. See Refresh the Diagram.

A load can be added to a busbar by simply dragging and dropping the load symbol onto the
busbar symbol. The load is then assigned to the busbar and the required cable and
protection device are automatically created.
Where the above method is not applicable, to connect a supply to a load (or vice versa),
hover the cursor over it. Note the blue squares that are displayed. These are the connection
points of the symbol (see the transformer in the example below).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Left-click on the required connection point, and drag the cursor towards the item that is to be
connected to. All free connection points on the diagram are then displayed as blue squares
(except in the case of MCCs, switchboards and distribution boards).

Note: The size of the blue square can be changed using the Symbol Connector settings
in the Distribution Diagram Options window.

As the cursor is dragged towards the equipment, a blue line ending in an arrow is drawn on
the diagram from the selected equipment point to the position of the mouse cursor. The
arrow head end of the line indicates the “load” end of the line.
Connect the end of the line to the required connection point in the item to be connected to.
The symbol for that connection point then changes from a blue square to a pink one,
indicating a valid connection (see below).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Release the mouse button. The connection is then made, as indicated by the black line
between the two items.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

To link one load to another, proceed in the same was as when connecting loads and
supplies. In the example below, Heater 2 is in the process of being connected to Heater 3
(meaning that Heater 2 will effectively become the supply for Heater 3).

To connect to an MCC, switchboard or distribution board, drag the cursor, as described


above, to the required busbar (or the distribution board), which will change to pink to
indicate a valid connection.

Release the mouse button. The connection is then made, as indicated by the black line
between the two items.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

If connecting from (rather than to) an MCC, switchboard or distribution board, click on the
required busbar (or the distribution board), which will then turn pink as shown in the
example above, and drag the mouse towards the equipment to be connected to as
described above.
If connecting to a load from an MCC or switchboard, a compartment with a default
connector element in it is automatically created as a result of creating this connection, the
symbols of which are added to the line.

If connecting from a supply to an MCC or switchboard, a compartment with a default


connector element is automatically created in the same way.
Compartments will be created with a default name and details which the user may then edit
(see below).
If connecting from a supply to a distribution board, a default connector element is
automatically created.

Note: Connector elements cannot be edited.

9.5.3 Refresh the Diagram


To refresh the data displayed on the diagram, and optionally add new loads, supplies and
interconnected equipment to the diagram, click the Refresh button.
The Refresh Options window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Click Refresh data only if only the data on the diagram (e.g. load values) are to be updated.
Click Refresh data and add interconnected if the data on the diagram is to be updated,
and interconnected equipment, including any new loads and supplies, are to be added to
the diagram.
Once the required option has been selected, click OK to refresh the diagram.

Update Supplies and Loads of an MCC, Switchboard or Distribution Board


To update the diagram by adding or removing loads and supplies to/from a specific MCC,
switchboard or distribution board added or removed since the diagram was last opened or
fully refreshed, right-click on it and select the Verify Supplies and Loads option from the
menu that is then displayed.
The diagram is then redrawn to depict the current loads and supplies of the selected item.

9.5.4 Disconnect Symbols


To disconnect two symbols, right-click on the connection and select Delete from the menu
that is then displayed.
The Delete Options window is displayed:

Click OK to delete the connection and the assignment between the two items.

Note: This does not delete the connecting cable, it merely disconnects it at both ends. The
cable remains in the cable schedule for the project. Cables must be deleted in
AVEVA Electrical Wiring Manager.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:23 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

9.5.5 Edit Symbols


To edit a symbol, e.g. a load, supply, incomer etc, either double-click on it, or right-click on it
and select the Edit Detail option from the menu that is then displayed.
The appropriate detail window for the item is then displayed. For example:

For details, continue at:


• Manually Add a Tag to the Loads List for loads.
• Manually Add a Tag to the Supplies List for supplies.
• Create Compartment Typicals for protection devices and incomers.
• Loads Assigned/Windings Tab - General for couplers.
When the detail window is closed, the Refresh Options window is displayed. See Refresh
the Diagram for details.

9.5.6 Create, Size and Add Wiring to Single or Multiple Cables

Create and Size Single Cables


To create a cable, right-click on it and select Create Cable from the menu that is then
displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:24 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

The Cable Details window is then displayed. Refer to AVEVA Electrical Wiring Manager
documentation for details.
Once a cable is created it is displayed in red instead of black.
To size a cable, right-click on it and select Size Cable from the menu that is then displayed.
The Cable Sizing window is then displayed. Refer to Calculate Single Cable Size for
details.

Create, Size and add Wiring to Multiple Cables


To create, size and/or apply wiring rules to the cables between a distribution board and any
assigned loads, toggle the window to Cable Mode, and click Size Cables. The Cable
Creation List window is then displayed:

The window list all potential cables from the distribution board to its assigned loads.
Each potential cable is listed with a default name in the format <distribution board
equipment number>/<load equipment number>. Enter a different name if required. If the
cable has already been created the cable name is “greyed out” and cannot be edited.
If a cable is to be created, check its Create checkbox.
If it is to have a wiring rule applied to it, check its Run Wiring Rule checkbox.
If it is to be sized check its Size Cable checkbox.
If it is to be sized using an external cable sizing template, check its External Cable Sizing
checkbox.
If the Run Wiring Rule, the Size Cable or the External Cable Sizing checkbox is checked,
the Create checkbox is checked automatically. If the Create checkbox is unchecked, the
other two checkboxes will be automatically unchecked.
Use the Select / Deselect All rows controls at the bottom of the window to check/uncheck
all checkboxes for the selected option.
Click Ok once the required options are selected. The selected cables are then created, and
where that option was selected, wiring rules assigned to the fed items are applied to the
cables, their terminations etc.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:25 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Cables for which the Size Cable or the External Cable Sizing checkbox is checked are
sized using automatically assigned parameters (length etc). The results of this procedure
are then displayed in a log window.

9.5.7 Edit Cables


To edit a cable, toggle the window to Cable Mode, right-click on the cable and select Edit
Cable from the menu that is then displayed.
The Cable Details window is then displayed. Refer to AVEVA Electrical Wiring Manager
documentation for details.
When data affecting the diagram is changed on a detail window, when the change is saved
a message is displayed to inform the user of this. For example:

Click OK to continue. The diagram then automatically refreshes to reflect the changes.

9.5.8 Add Distribution Board Circuits


To add circuits to a distribution board in a Key One Line diagram, right-click on the board
symbol or within its container and select the Add Circuit(s) option from the menu.
The Add Circuit(s) window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:26 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Enter the start number of the circuit identifiers in the Start field and the number of circuits to
be added in the Number field. From the Phase(s) Used list, select the phases of the circuits
(all circuits added will be of this type).
The Circuit Name(s) field will then list the names of the circuits to be added. For example:

Once the required details have been entered and selected, click Save.
The circuits are then added to the distribution diagram. Use the functionality available from
the Loads Assigned tab of the Supplies window of the distribution board to view and edit
details of them (refer to Loads Assigned Tab - Distribution Boards).
The added circuits will not be displayed on the Key One Line diagram until the diagram is
fully refreshed or re-opened.

9.5.9 Delete Symbols


To delete a symbol, e.g. a load, supply, incomer etc, right-click on it and select the Delete
option from the menu that is then displayed, or select it and press the Delete key

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:27 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Note: Use the second method to delete multiple items. The right-click menu will not be
displayed if multiple items are selected.

Note: Couplers cannot be deleted. The busbar it connects to must be deleted. The coupler
is deleted along with it.

The Delete Options window is displayed:

If the symbol is to be deleted both from the diagram and the database, click Delete from
Diagram and Database. If the symbol is to be deleted from the diagram but the equipment
it represents is to remain in the database, click Delete from Diagram only.
Click OK to implement the selected deletion option.
Note that if the second option is selected, any load/supply connections between the deleted
item and other items will remain.
Note that protection devices and incomers can only be deleted if they are spares. If an
attempt is made to delete a connected protection device or incomer a message is displayed
to inform the user of this. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:28 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

MCCs, switchboards and distribution boards that consist of a single busbar only (i.e. they
have no other busbars, incomers or protection devices) cannot be deleted either. A warning
message is also be issued if the user tries to delete such an item.

9.5.10 Reassign Loads to Other Compartments


Loads can be moved from one compartment to another compartment of the supply. To
reassign a load, right-click the compartment it is currently in. From the menu that is then
displayed, select Reassign to. A sub-menu that lists all available busbars that have
compartments with compatible voltages is then displayed.

Select the required busbar. A further sub-menu listing that busbar’s available compartments
is then displayed. Click the compartment that the load is to be moved to.
The Options window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:29 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

If the elements in the source compartment are also to be moved to the target compartment,
click Move the Elements from the source Compartment to the target Compartment. If
this option is selected, the elements in the target compartment will be deleted.
If the elements in the source compartment are to be left in the source compartment, click
Don’t move the Elements from the source Compartment. From the list below this option,
select the compartment element that the load will be assigned to as its fed item.
When the required option is selected, click OK to complete the reassignment.

9.5.11 Change Graphical Order of Compartment Elements


To change the order in which elements are connected in a compartment, right-click on it.
Select Connect from from the menu that is then displayed, then select the required element
from the sub-menu. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:30 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Note: Compartments which are populated with the elements defined in a compartment
typical cannot be rearranged in this way. The Connect from menu option will not be
displayed.

For element with symbols that have more than one connection point, further sub-menus will
be available for each of them, listing the available (unused) connections. Select the required
connection.
The order of the elements in the diagram will then rearrange accordingly.

Note: This is a graphical change only. It does not change which elements feed which other
elements.

9.6 Add and Edit Distribution Diagram Project Symbols


A list of pre-defined symbols for used on distribution diagrams is supplied with Electrical
Engineer. Users may also create their own symbols if required.
Refer to:
• Pre-Defined Symbols
• User-Defined Symbols

9.6.1 Pre-Defined Symbols


A list of pre-defined symbols for use on distribution diagrams is supplied with Electrical
Engineer. These symbols and this list cannot be edited, but the fields selected to label these
symbols on a diagram can be changed.
Pre-defined symbols are supplied for the following:
• Motor Control Centres
• Distribution Boards
• Switchboards

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:31 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

• Busbars
Click Setup > Symbols > Pre Defined in the Project tab. The Pre Defined Symbol List
window is then displayed:

The window lists, for both Key One Line and Single Line diagrams, the available fields for
each type of pre-defined symbol. Next to each available field there is a checkbox. Those
fields selected to label a symbol have their checkboxes checked.
Check or uncheck checkboxes as required to change the list of selected fields. The list of
selected fields for a particular symbol/diagram type is displayed beneath each list.
Click the Clear checkbox for a symbol to uncheck all its checkboxes.
Click Save to save any changes and exit the window.
Click Cancel to exit the window without saving changes.

9.6.2 User-Defined Symbols


Pre-defined symbols are supplied for the Motor Control Centres, Distribution Boards,
Switchboards and Busbars. Refer to Pre-Defined Symbols for details. These cannot be
edited by users, nor can other symbols be created for these types of equipment.
However, the symbols supplied for other types of equipment, including compartment
elements, can be edited, and if required, alternative symbols may be defined for them.
To view, edit and create user-defined and definable symbols, Setup > Symbols > User
Defined in the Project tab. The User Defined Symbol List window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:32 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

The window displays each user-defined symbol and their properties.


If required, only AVEVA Default or NEC or BS, ICE and DIN standard symbols may be
displayed. Select the required standard from the Standard list.

Note: New standards are created in the Symbol Detail window, as described below.

If only a certain type of symbol is required to be displayed (e.g. motors), select it from the
Type list.
The name of each symbol is displayed at the top of each symbol section.
Beneath this are two checkboxes: For Key One Line and For Single Line. If these are
checked, this indicates the symbol is the default symbol used to represent the equipment
type associated with that symbol for that type of drawing.
The equipment type is displayed beneath the checkboxes.
Use the scale slider at the bottom of the window or the + and - buttons at either end of this
slider to zoom in and out of this display. Click Max to increase the zoom level to the
maximum level. Click Restore to return the zoom level to the default level.

Create New Symbols


To create a new symbol, click New. The Symbol Detail window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:33 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Enter the name of the new symbol in the Name field.


Select the equipment that the symbol is to represent from the Equipment type list.
Once an equipment type has been selected, the list of datalinks relevant to the selected
equipment type is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:34 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

This list consists of all the fields that object type which may be selected to label the symbol,
divided into categories that can be expanded to view their contents by clicking on the
category title.
To select a datalink to label the symbol, select it from the list then drag and drop it onto the
drawing pane in the required position. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:35 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Datalinks can subsequently be dragged and dropped to other positions as required.


To edit datalink text, right-click on the datalink and select the Edit Text option from the
menu that is then displayed, and enter the new datalink text:

To delete a datalink, right-click on it and select the Delete option from the menu that is then
displayed.
To delete all datalinks, right-click on a datalink and select the Delete All option from the
menu that is then displayed.
To change the anchor point of the datalink text, right-click on it and select the Anchor option
from the menu that is then displayed, then select the Left, Centre or Right option as
required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:36 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Check the For Key One Line and/or the For Single Line checkbox as required if the
symbol is to be the default symbol used on diagrams of these types.
Select the standard to which the symbol is to be added (AVEVA Default or NEC or BS, ICE
and DIN) from the Standard list.
To create a new standard, enter its name in the Standard field. The new standard will be
created when the new symbol is saved.
To draw the new symbol, click Open Symbol Editor. The Symbol Editor window is then
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:37 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

The controls used to draw symbols are as follows:

Used to undo changes. CTRL+Z may also be used.

Used to redo changes. CTRL+Y may also be used.

Used to import a .dwg file which can then be edited as required. Opens a
standard Windows Open window from which the required file can be selected.

Pointer control used to select, move, resize and reshape objects in the
drawing pane.

Used to place a rectangle in the drawing pane.

Used to place an ellipse in the drawing pane.

Used to place a straight line in the drawing pane.

Pencil tool, used to draw a non-straight line in the drawing pane.

Used to place text in the drawing.

Used to control the font, text size etc of text placed in the drawing pane.
Opens the Select Font window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:38 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Used to select the colour of objects and text placed in the drawing pane.
Opens the Select Colour window:

Used to specify the width of the lines of objects placed in the drawing pane.

Used to specify whether or not rectangles and ellipses are to be filled.

Used to specify the symbol line style. Displays the Select Line Style window:

The current position of the cursor in the drawing pane is displayed at the bottom of the
window.
Use the scale slider at the bottom of the window or the + and - buttons at either end of this
slider to zoom in and out of the drawing pane. Click Max to increase the zoom level to the
maximum level. Click Restore to return the zoom level to the default level.
Click OK to save the symbol drawing and exit the window. The symbol is then displayed in
the symbol display pane in the Symbol Detail window. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:39 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Click Cancel to exit the window without saving.


In the Symbol Detail window, use the scale slider at the bottom of the window or the + and
- buttons at either end of this slider to zoom in and out of the drawing pane. Click Max to
increase the zoom level to the maximum level. Click Restore to return the zoom level to the
default level.
Click Align to Top Left to move the symbol to the top-left of the symbol display pane.
In and out connector points are automatically placed in default positions on the symbol as
appropriate for the equipment type.

These may be dragged to different positions as required.They may not be deleted.


Additional “out” connectors for Transformers may be added and all types of compartment
elements.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:40 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

When a transformer or compartment element is being created or edited, an additional


button, Add Out Connectors, is displayed on the Symbol Detail window.

Click this button to add another out connector to the symbol, and then move it as required. A
symbol may have no more than two out connectors. A message is displayed to inform the
user of this if the user attempts to add a third out connector.
In the case of transformers, another button, Add ER Connector is also provided. Click this
button to add an ER connector to the symbol and then drag it to the required position. Up to
two ER connectors can be added.
In the case of compartment element, another button, Remove Out Connector is also
provided. Click this button to add the out connector last added to the symbol, or the default
out connector if only that is present on the symbol.
To save a new symbol and exit the Symbol Detail window, click OK.
If the symbol has been set as the default symbol for a diagram type and a default symbol
has already been set for the equipment type/diagram type, a message is displayed. For
example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:41 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

To make the new symbol the default symbol for the equipment type/diagram type, click Yes.
Otherwise click No. The default symbol will remain unchanged.
Click Cancel to exit the window without saving.

Copy Symbols
New symbols can be created by copying and changing existing symbols. Select the symbol
to be copied from the User Defined Symbol List window and click Copy Selected. The
Symbol Detail window is then displayed with the symbol displayed and with default name of
“copy of <copied symbol name>”. For example:

Edit the symbol and add and edit its details as required (see above for details) and click OK.
The Copy Selected button is disabled if the Multi-Select checkbox is checked.

Import Symbols from another Project


To import symbols from another project, click Import symbols from other project. The
Select an AVEVA Electrical Project window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:42 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Select the required project and click Select. The Symbol List From Other Project window
is then displayed:

The window lists all the user-defined symbols in the selected project.
Use the scale slider at the bottom of the window or the + and - buttons at either end of this
slider to zoom in and out of the drawing pane. Click Max to increase the zoom level to the
maximum level. Click Restore to return the zoom level to the default level.
To import a symbol, select it and click Import. To select multiple symbols, check the Multi-
Select checkbox and click Import.
If a symbol being imported has the same name as one in the current project a message is
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:43 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Distribution Diagrams

Click Yes to replace the existing symbol with the imported symbol.

Edit Symbols
To edit a symbol, select it from the User Defined Symbol List window and click Edit, or
double-click on it.
The Symbol Detail window is then displayed (see above). Edit the symbol and its details as
required and click OK.
The Edit button is disabled if the Multi-Select checkbox is checked.

Delete Symbols
To delete a symbol, select it from the User Defined Symbol List window and click Delete.
To delete multiple symbols, check the Multi-Select checkbox before clicking Delete.

Note: Be careful when deleting symbols as it is possible to delete symbols that have been
added to diagrams. No warning is issued. In such cases, the deleted symbols on
diagrams will be replaced by squares with the words “No Symbol” in them.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:44 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

10 Equipment Catalogues

Electrical Engineer includes equipment catalogues in which project compartment elements,


typical compartment contents, and motors can be defined. These can subsequently be
selected from when creating project equipment.
Refer to:
• Compartment Elements Catalogue
• Compartment Typicals Catalogue
• Motor Catalogue
There is also a datasheet catalogue. See Datasheet Form Catalogue for details.

Import from Excel


Users may import catalogue item data into the AVEVA Electrical project database from a
Microsoft Excel Workbook.
This facility for equipment catalogues are the same as that for loads. Refer to Loads List for
details.

10.1 Compartment Elements Catalogue


The Compartment Elements Catalogue is used to define the list of compartment elements,
(e.g. protection devices, relays, switches etc) that can be selected from when defining the
content of MCC and Switchboard compartments (see Compartments Tab - MCCs and
Switchboards).
To open the Compartment Elements Catalogue, click Select in the Grids and Schedules
section of the Home tab.
Select Compartment Elements under the Catalogue heading from the list of grids that is
then displayed. The Compartment Elements grid is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

Continue at:
• Create Catalogue Compartment Element
• Edit Catalogue Compartment Element

10.1.1 Create Catalogue Compartment Element


To add a new catalogue compartment element to the project, with the Compartment
Elements Catalogue open click New in the Records section of the Home tab to display the
Compartment Element Catalogue window:

From the Type Group list select the compartment element type group, then from the Type
list select the compartment element type from the selected group.

Note: Compartment element types and type groups are specified using the Compartment
Element Groups window. Refer to Compartment Element Types for details.

Enter a unique identifier for the new compartment element in the Catalogue No. field.
Complete the Manufacturer, Model No and Description fields as required.
The Symbols section is used to select which user-defined symbols are to be used to
represent the new compartment element on Key One Line and Single Line Diagrams.
Click the button next to the KOL or SLD field as appropriate. The User Defined Symbol
List window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

The window displays all the user-defined symbols defined for the selected compartment
element type (refer to User-Defined Symbols for details). If none have been defined for the
type, the window will be blank.
Double-click on the required symbol, or select it and click Select. The name of the selected
symbol is then displayed in the field.
In the No. of Terminals section, enter the number of left and right terminals on the
compartment element type in the Left and Right fields.
The Properties section lists all the properties that the compartment element type has been
associated with (refer to Property Definitionsfor details). As required, enter values for these
properties in the Property Value fields.
Once the required details have been specified click OK. The new compartment element
type is then added to the catalogue.

10.1.2 Edit Catalogue Compartment Element


Double-click on the row of the catalogue compartment element type to be edited, or select it
and click Edit in the Records section of the Home tab to display the Compartment
Element Catalogue window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

Edit the details as required (see Create Catalogue Compartment Element for details) and
click OK.

10.2 Compartment Typicals Catalogue


Compartments are often populated with the same or similar arrangements of multiple
compartment element types. A catalogue of these “typical” arrangements can be set up.
When the contents of compartments are specified, the user can select these compartment
typicals instead of individual compartment elements, which may substantially reduce the
user’s workload.
To open the Compartment Typicals Catalogue, click Select in the Grids and Schedules
section of the Home tab.
Select Compartment Typicals under the Catalogue heading from the list of grids that is
then displayed. The Compartment Typicals grid is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

Compartment Typicals - Lists Tool Options

The following options are located on the List Tools - Compartment Typicals tab:

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Actions Section

Sync to If the details of compartments typicals have been changed after


Compartments they have been applied to compartments, this option is used to
apply those changes to all those compartments. Refer to Update
Compartments with changes to Compartment Typicals for
details.

Continue at:
• Create Compartment Typicals
• Edit Compartment Typicals
• Update Compartments with changes to Compartment Typicals

10.2.1 Create Compartment Typicals


To add a new compartment typical to the project, with the Compartment Typicals Catalogue
open click New in the Records section of the Home tab to display the Compartment
Typical window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

Enter a unique name for the compartment typical in the Name field and a description in the
Description field.

Add a Compartment Element


A compartment typical must include at least one compartment element. To add a
compartment element, first specify its type. Click Add. The Select Equipment Type
window is then displayed, listing all compartment element types.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

Note: Compartment element types are specified using the Compartment Element
Groups window. Refer to Compartment Element Types for details.

Double-click on the required type, or select it then click Select. An element of that type with
an automatically generated name is then added to the window. For example:

The automatically generated names are taken from the short form name of the selected
compartment element type, suffixed with a number.
Repeat for each required compartment element.

Enter Compartment Element Details


To specify the details of the compartment element, double-click on its row in the
Compartment Typical window. The Detail window for the equipment type is then
displayed. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

The window shows the compartment element type and type group, and the name and
description of the compartment typical. These details cannot be changed.
The Name field displays the default compartment element name. Amend this as required.
If required, change the Load Flow from Closed (the default) to Open.
The details in the Catalogue Information section of the window can be completed by
selecting an element from the Compartment Elements Catalogue.
Alternately, users may simply enter details into these fields “manually”.
To select an element from the catalogue, click the button in the Catalogue No field. The
Select from Catalogue window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

The window lists the catalogue elements of the same type as the typical compartment
element. Double-click on the required catalogue element, or select it then click Select.
The Select from Catalogue window then closes and the details of the selected catalogue
element then populate the fields in the Catalogue Information section. These details
cannot be changed.
The Customize button is disabled when this window is accessed from the Typicals
catalogue.
Alternately, to enter details “manually”. Complete the Manufacturer, Model No and
Description fields as required.
The Symbols section is used to select which user-defined symbols are to be used to
represent the new compartment element on Key One Line and Single Line Diagrams.
Click the button next to the KOL or SLD field as appropriate. The User Defined Symbol
List window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

The window displays all the user-defined symbols defined for the selected compartment
element type (refer to User-Defined Symbols for details). If none have been defined for the
type, the window will be blank.
Double-click on the required symbol, or select it and click Select. The name of the selected
symbol is then displayed in the field.
In the No. of Terminals section, enter the number of left and right terminals on the
compartment element type in the Left and Right fields.
The Properties section lists all the properties that the compartment element type has been
associated with (refer to Property Definitions for details). As required, enter values for these
properties in the Property Value fields.
Once the required details have been specified click OK.

Change Compartment Element Order


To change the order of the compartment elements in the compartment typical, select an
element and click the Up or Down button as required.
The selected element will move up or down one position each time the button is clicked.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

Change Fed Item Assignments


To assign an element to be fed from a different element in the compartment typical, right-
click on it. Select Feed from from the menu that is then displayed, then select the required
element from the sub-menu. For example:

The element will then be assigned as a fed item for the selected element. If that item is
already feeding another element, the element will added as a second fed item, and listed in
the Fed Item 2 field. For example:

Note: Compartment elements may feed more than two other elements, but the window will
only display the first two.

Delete Compartment Elements


To delete a compartment element, select it and click Delete.
A message is then displayed requesting that the deletion be confirmed. Click Yes to
continue at delete the element from the compartment typical.

Open Graphical Views of the Typical


The graphical view of a compartment typical, at it would appear in a distribution diagram can
be viewed and edited.
This can be done by clicking the Graphical Viewer KOL and Graphical Viewer SLD
buttons.
Alternately, if changes have been made to the typical, a message is displayed when the
Compartment Typical window is closed, informing the user of this, and asking whether the
user wishes to view these changes graphically:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

Click Yes to open the graphical views of the typical.


Refer to View and Edit Compartment Typical Graphics for further details.

10.2.2 View and Edit Compartment Typical Graphics


The graphical view of a compartment typical, at it would appear in a distribution diagram can
be viewed and edited.
The graphical view can be accessed from buttons in the Compartment Typical window.
Click Graphical Viewer KOL to view how the compartment typical will appear when part of
a Key One Line diagram.
Click Graphical Viewer SLD to view how the compartment typical will appear when part of
a Single Line Diagram.
Alternately, if changes have been made to the typical, a message is displayed when the
Compartment Typical window is closed, informing the user of this, and asking whether the
user wishes to view these changes graphically:

Click Yes.Note that the graphical view of the compartment typical is displayed twice if this
option is, one of each distribution diagram type.
A viewer window displaying the compartment typical is then displayed. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

If an item that was part of the typical has subsequently been deleted, a message is
displayed to inform the user of this. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

View Options
The following facilities are located at the bottom of the window:
• To zoom in and out use the Scale slider, the plus and minus buttons, or hold down the
Ctrl key and move the mouse wheel up (to zoom in) or down (to zoom out).
• Click Scale to Fit to zoom out or in so that contents of the diagram fit the window.
• To display a small window in the bottom-right corner of the main window displaying an
overview of the diagram, click Overview.

Select Drawing Elements


To select the compartment container, compartment label or a compartment element, left-
click on it. The selected item is surrounded by a green box.
To select multiple items either:
• Select items by left-clicking on their symbols and holding down the Shift key. The first
item selected is surrounded by a green box, subsequent items by a blue box.
• Drawing a “box” around the items to be selected by left-clicking on one corner of the
box dragging the cursor, while holding down the left mouse button to the opposite
corner. A pink box is drawn around the selected area. Release the mouse button. All
items fully in the box are then selected and are surrounded by blue boxes.
• Press Ctrl+A to select everything on the drawing. All items are surrounded by blue
boxes.

Move Drawing Elements


To move elements, select them (see above) and drag them to the required location.
Connections will stretch etc. to maintain links between elements.

Change Graphical Order of Compartment Typical Elements


To change the order in which elements are connected in the compartment typical, right-click
on it. Select Connect from from the menu that is then displayed, then select the required
element from the sub-menu. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

For element with symbols that have more than one connection point, further sub-menus will
be available for each of them, listing the available (unused) connections. Select the required
connection.
The order of the elements in the graphical view will then rearrange accordingly.

Note: This is a graphical change only. It does not change which elements feed which other
elements. This is set in the Compartment Typical window. Refer to Change Fed
Item Assignments.

Toolbar Options

Save Layout Saves changes to the drawing.

Refresh Manually refreshes the drawing with changes to the layout that
were not automatically implemented in the drawing.

Show Grid Used to toggle the display of the drawing grid on and off (it is on
by default).

Snap to Grid Used to toggle the snapping of drawing elements to the grid on
and off (it is on by default).

Print Used to print the diagram. Opens a standard Print window.

Close Closes the diagram window.

10.2.3 Edit Compartment Typicals


Double-click on the row of the compartment typical to be edited, or select it and click Edit in
the Records section of the Home tab to display the Compartment Typical window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

Edit the details as required (see Create Compartment Typicals for details) and click OK.
If changes were made that will change how the compartment typical would appear in
distribution diagrams, a message will be displayed asking the user whether or not they wish
to view these changes. Refer to View and Edit Compartment Typical Graphics for details.
Once the details of a compartment typical have been edited, the changes should be applied
to those compartments to which the compartment typical has already been applied. Refer to
Update Compartments with changes to Compartment Typicals for details.

10.2.4 Update Compartments with changes to Compartment Typicals


If the details of a compartment typical are edited, the changes should be applied to those
compartments to which the compartment typical has already been applied.
To do so, select the compartment typical and click Sync to Compartments in the Actions
section of the List Tools tab. The Sync Compartment by Typical window is then
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

The window lists the compartments which will be updated by the procedure.
To proceed with the update, click Apply.
The outcome of each update is displayed in the Result column, e.g. “Updated”:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

Compartments that are being edited by another user will not be updated, and this will be
reflected in the Result column.
Click OK to exit the window.

10.3 Motor Catalogue


The Motor Catalogue is used to define the list of motors that can be selected from when
specifying a load which is a motor (see Manually Add a Tag to the Loads List).
To open the Motor Catalogue, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the
Home tab.
Select Motors under the Catalogue heading from the list of grids that is then displayed. The
Motor Catalogue grid is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

Refer to Working with the Data Grid for information on the grid controls including selecting a
record, and sorting and filtering the grid data.
Continue at:
• Create Catalogue Motor
• Edit Catalogue Motor
• Import Motor Catalogue Data

10.3.1 Create Catalogue Motor


To add a new catalogue motor to the project, with the Motor Catalogue open click New in
the Records section of the Home tab to display the Motor window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

Enter the required details and click OK. The new motor is then added to the catalogue.

Note: “POT” stands for Pull-out torque.

10.3.2 Edit Catalogue Motor


Existing catalogue motors can be edited directly in the grid itself by selecting a cell and
entering a new value.
Alternately, either double-click on the row of the catalogue motor to be edited, or select it
and click Edit in the Records section of the Home tab to display the Motor window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

Edit the details as required and click OK.

10.3.3 Import Motor Catalogue Data


Data can be imported into the Motor Catalogue from various sources.
Continue at:
• Import Motor Catalogue Data from Excel
• AVEVA P&ID Motor Catalogue Import
• AVEVA Schematic Model Motor Catalogue Import
• AVEVA Tags Motor Catalogue Import
• AVEVA Diagrams Motor Catalogue Import
• Import Catalogue Motors From Other Project

Import Motor Catalogue Data from Excel


Users may import motor catalogue data into the AVEVA Electrical project database from a
Microsoft Excel Workbook.
This facility for supplies is the same as that for loads. Refer to Loads List for details.

AVEVA P&ID Motor Catalogue Import


Supply data may be imported from AVEVA P&ID in the same way as load data. Refer to
AVEVA P&ID Load Tags Import for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Equipment Catalogues

AVEVA Schematic Model Motor Catalogue Import


Motor catalogue data may be imported from AVEVA Schematic Model in the same way as
load data. Refer to AVEVA Schematic Model Load Tags Import for details.

AVEVA Tags Motor Catalogue Import


Motor catalogue data may be imported from AVEVA Tags in the same way as load data.
Refer to AVEVA Engineering Load Tags Import for details.

AVEVA Diagrams Motor Catalogue Import


Motor catalogue data may be imported from AVEVA Diagrams in the same way as load
data. Refer to AVEVA Diagrams Load Tag Import for details.

AVEVA Diagrams Motor Catalogue Import


Motor catalogue data may be imported from AVEVA Diagrams in the same way as load
data. Refer to AVEVA Diagrams Load Tag Import for details.

Import Catalogue Motors From Other Project


Catalogue motors may be imported from another AVEVA Electrical project in a multi-project
environment in the same way as catalogue datasheets. Refer to Import Catalogue
Datasheets From Other Project for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Exports

11 Exports

This section describes the export options available on the Manage and List Tools tabs.
Continue at:
• Export to Excel
• Export to XPS and PDF Files
• Export Selected Datasheet Files
• Export to AVEVA NET

11.1 Export to Excel


The export contents of all the grids and catalogues accessible from the Select option on the
Home tab can be exported to an Excel spreadsheet with same layout of columns and rows.
Data can also be exported to an Excel spreadsheet from a number of windows that display
data in a grid.
For a description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

11.2 Export to XPS and PDF Files


The export contents of all the grids and catalogues accessible from the Select option on the
Home tab can be exported to PDF and XPS files.
For a description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

11.3 Export Selected Datasheet Files


The datasheet files (.xls files) of datasheets selected in the Datasheets List grid can be
exported to:
• a folder specified at time of export with file names formed from the document number
and sheet number in the normal way, and
• a pre-defined folder or folders with file names in a pre-defined, user-defined format.
The folder(s) and the file name format are specified using facilities accessed from the
Setup menu of the Project tab, as described below.
Datasheet files can be exported with or without changes made since the last issue
highlighted.
The .xls files of the selected drawing must be present in the Datasheet folder of the project.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 11:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Exports

11.3.1 Export Datasheets to a Specified Folder


Select the drawings in the Datasheets grid.
On the List Tools - Datasheets tab, click Selected Datasheets in the Export section, then
Copy/Archive to a Folder from the menu that is then displayed.
If changes made since the last issue are to be highlighted, click Copy/Archive to a Folder
with Previous Issue's Changes highlighted instead.
A standard Windows Browse For Folder window is then displayed:

Use the window to select the folder to which the datasheets are to exported and click OK.
The export of the selected datasheets then takes place. A message is displayed when the
export is completed, for example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 11:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Exports

11.3.2 Export Datasheets to Pre-Defined Folders with File Names in a Pre-


Defined Format
Before datasheets can be exported using this option, the folder or folders to which they are
to be exported and the format of the datasheet file names must be defined.

Setting the Folder Name and File Name Folder


To specify the folder and sub-folders that drawings are to be exported into, and the files
names that they will be given, click Setup on the Project tab. On the Setup menu, click
Export File Name/Folders.
The File Export Settings window is then displayed:

In the Root Folder field, enter the root folder under which the sub-folders that contain the
exported files are to be located. Click the … button to browse for the required folder.
If no sub-folders are specified, as described below, all the files will be exported into this
folder.
To specify the sub-folder structure, select the drawing attributes that will define the names of
the sub-folders and from the Sub Folder list.
To select an attribute, check the appropriate checkbox. The selected attribute is then
displayed in curly brackets in the field below the list.
As required, enter delimiter characters or text between the selected attributes in this field.
To specify the file name format of exported drawings, follow the same procedure as for sub-
folders, but using the File Name list and field.
Example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 11:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Exports

In the example above, a Sub Folder structure of {ProjectNo}-Area{AreaNo} and a file name
format of {DocNo}-{Sheet}-{Rev} have been selected. The selected root folder is
"C:\AVEVA".
Using these settings, from a project called "Project1", drawings are exported with the
following details:

Area Document Number Sheet Number Revision

00 ABC123 1 A

01 XYZ890 1 B

This will result in the creation of folder structure and files as follows:
C:\AVEVA (root folder)
Project1-Area00 (sub-folder)
ABC123-1-RevA.xls (exported datasheet file)
Project1-Area01 (sub-folder)
XYZ890-1-RevB.xls (exported datasheet file)

Exporting Datasheets
Select the datasheets in the Datasheets Grid.
On the List Tools - Datasheets tab, click Selected Datasheets in the Export section, then
Copy to User Defined Names from the menu that is then displayed.
If changes made since the last issue are to be highlighted, click Copy to User Defined
Names with Previous Issue's Changes highlighted instead.
The export of the selected datasheets then takes place. A message is displayed when the
export is completed, for example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 11:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Exports

11.4 Export to AVEVA NET


AVEVA Electrical Engineer includes facilities to export files of item data and report PDF files
for import into AVEVA NET.
The following can be exported:
• Loads data
• Supplies data
• Packages data
• Equipment data
• Datasheets data
• Document List data
• Reports and associated item data (i.e. of the items on the reports)
The files produced by the exported can subsequently be imported into AVEVA NET Portal
(refer to AVEVA NET documentation for details).

11.4.1 AVEVA NET Export Configuration


Before files can be exported for AVEVA NET, the export must be configured.
From the Project tab, click Setup, then Publish to AVEVA NET Configuration. The
AVEVA NET Export Configuration window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 11:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Exports

Electrical data of various types and from different sources can be exported to AVEVA NET,
for example loads data or data from reports. From the Name field, select the type of data
export to AVEVA NET to be configured.
If a log file is to be generated for the export type, check the Log Enabled checkbox.
The Log File field will then become enabled. In the field, specify the file name and the
location of the log file (a .txt file). Click the … button to browse for the required folder.
In the Staging Area field, specify the top level folder into which files are to be exported.
Click the … button to browse for the required folder.
If the Create Trigger File checkbox is checked, a trigger.start file (an empty text file) is
created in the staging area folder for each file type. The purpose of the trigger.start file is to
trigger the AVEVA NET Portal’s import controller to automatically process all the files that
reside in the same folder.
If, for every object being exported, a separate output file is to be generated, check the
Output File Per Object checkbox.
To select mapping files for the export of data and specify other settings, click Settings. The
Non-CAD Mapping Configuration window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 11:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Exports

The mappings between Electrical data and AVEVA NET Portal format data are stored in
XML files, one for each of the types of mapping:
• Object Mapping
• Class Mapping
For details of these files, refer to AVEVA NET Export Configuration Files.
Click the appropriate … button to browse for the required mapping file.

Click the open file button to open the selected file. It will open in the default text editor,
for example Notepad.
If no file is specified in the field, a new, blank .txt file is opened. If a file is specified that does
not exist, the user will be asked if they want to create that file at the specified location. If the
users clicks Yes, a new blank .txt file is created and opened for editing.
To populate the fields with the default mapping files supplied with AVEVA Electrical, click
Copy Sample Files.

11.4.2 Export Data from Grids


To export data from the Loads List, Supplies List, Packages List, Equipment List,
Datasheets or Document List grid, select the items from the grid and from the Manage tab,
click Publish to AVEVA NET in the Integration section.
The Export To AVEVA NET window is then displayed, showing the progress of the import:

Once the export is completed, the Export Report window is displayed, listing the items for
which a data export was requested and whether or not that export was successful or not.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 11:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Exports

11.4.3 Export Reports and Associated Data


To export reports and associated data, in the Reports section of the Home tab, click Report
Manager to open the Report Manager.
Select the report to be exported, then click Publish to AVEVA NET.
A Save As window is then displayed. Specify the name and the location that the report PDF
is to be saved to. Click Save.
The Export to AVEVA NET window is then displayed, followed by the Export Report
window, as described in Export Data from Grids.

11.4.4 Export Overview


AVEVA Schematic Gateway is a common Gateway that will be used by different AVEVA
schematic applications to export various kinds of data to AVEVA NET. This Gateway refers
to various configurations which are provided to it through various configuration files
(described in sections below).
As of now, AVEVA Schematic Gateway processes data (provided to it in a form of a Dataset)
as well some external files (Excel spreadsheets - xls and xlsx, PDF files).
• Data provided to the Gateway through dataset gets processed and output gets
generated into EIWM format.
• Gateway processes excel spreadsheets and produces output in MHTML format.
• Gateway processes PDF files and produces output in PDF format.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 11:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

12 Cable Sizing

Engineer includes a facility for calculating the sizes of cables required for loads. The facility
will calculate the core size and cable type of cables required for a load based on the values
entered by the user, and automatically generate the required cables.
The equations used for cable sizing are either from a selected standard, or user-generated
equations stored in an external file (an Excel spreadsheet).
Continue at:
• Cable Sizing Setup
• Calculate Single Cable Size
• Calculate Multiple Cable Sizes
• External Cable Sizing
• Cable Sizing Check Report

12.1 Cable Sizing Setup


The standard used in Engineering is selected using the Options window: AS, BS, IEC or
NEC).
To specify the default values displayed in the Cable Sizing window (see below), select
Setup > Cable Sizing Configuration from the Project tab. The Cable Sizing
Configuration window is then displayed. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Note: The exact layout of the window will depend on the selected standard.

Enter or select the default values. Note that fields displayed in the lower section of the
window change to depending on whether Free Air or Buried Underground is selected from
the External Situation list.
To view and (if required) add de-rating factors, access the De-Rating Factors tab:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

The top section lists the de-rating factors from the selected cables sizing standard. These
cannot be edited.
The lower section is used to add, edit and delete project specific de-rating factors if
required.
Click Add to create a new de-rating factor, and enter its description and value in the fields
provided.
To delete a de-rating factor, select it and click Delete.

Note: Project specific de-rating factors should all be fully defined before any cable sizing
calculations are preformed.
When a project specific de-rating factor is added or deleted, any cable calculations
already carried out are made effectively incorrect. The following message will be
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

This does not happen if de-rating factors are edited.


To specify which fields are to be included on the Cable Sizing Check Report, access the
Cable Sizing Check Report tab:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

The tab lists the cable property fields. If a field is to be included in the report, make sure its
Select checkbox is checked.
Click Save to save any changes and exit the window.

12.2 Calculate Single Cable Size


To calculate the cable size for a single load, select the load from the Loads List, then click
Cable Sizing in the Calculations section of the List Tools - Loads tab. The Cable Sizing
window is then displayed.

Note: The first time that the Cable Sizing window is accessed the following disclaimer is
displayed:

The message can be viewed again from a link on the Cable Sizing window.
The layout of the window depends on the cable sizing standard selected in the Options
window (AS, BS, IEC or NEC). For example, if the IEC standard is selected, the following is
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Note: For further details of the Cable Sizing window, refer to the AVEVA Electrical
Common Functionality User Guide.

Note: If user-defined cable sizing equations from a spreadsheet are to be used, check the
External Cable Sizing checkbox. Refer to External Cable Sizing for details.

Whichever standard is in use, select the appropriate details on the Cable Sizing tab and
complete the Cable Length field.

Note: If no length is entered, cable sizing may still take place using the default length
entered in the Preferences window, if Zero Length Cable Sizing is enabled in that
window. Refer to Options for details.

From the External Situation list, select either Free Air or Buried Underground. The middle
section of the tab then changes to display the fields relevant to the selected situation. For
example:

or:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

The Fault Protection tab includes two further tabs, Short Circuit and Earth Current:

On the Short Circuit tab, complete the details as required, and click the Calculate Short
Circuit button to calculate the minimum required core size.
On the Earth Current tab, enter the voltage factor at device value, and click Calculate
Earth Fault Current to calculate the Earth Loop Impedance and Earth Fault Current values.

Calculate Cable Size


To calculate the cable size, click the Size Cable button. The Sizing Result tab is then
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

The Running Condition, Starting Condition, and Fault Protection fields are completed
automatically when the Size Cable button is pressed.
Clicking the up arrow next to the Core Size field, increases the size and re-calculates the
sizing results.

Specify De-Rating Factor


After the Size Cable button is clicked, the De-rating Factor section on the Cable Sizing tab
displays calculated de-rating factor values, based on the cable installation configuration.

The user can select a de-rating factor which will be used instead of the calculated value.
To select a de-rating factor, click the De-rating Factors button. The Derating Factors
window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Select the required factor from the list. The list includes the de-rating factors that are part of
the standard, and user-defined project specific de-rating factor set up using the Cable
Sizing Configuration window (see Cable Sizing Setup).
If a value is 1 then the rating will have no effect on the calculation.
Click Save. The selected factor is then displayed in the Chosen De-rating Factor field.
The Chosen De-rating Factor field value can only be set by the user to be equal to or less
than the Calculated De-rating Factor field value.
If this field is blank when the Size Cable button is clicked, it will be automatically populated
with the calculated value.

Complete Sizing Fields


Finally, click the Update button on the Sizing Result tab to complete the Project Cable
Data fields: Cable Number (an automatically generated number), Cable Type and Core
Size.
Clicking on the up arrow button on the Sizing Result tab (see below) will select a higher
cable size from the cable catalogue. The application will then re-calculate the core size,
current, voltage drop, and short circuit and earth fault calculations.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Note: In order for cable data to be selected from the cable catalogue, the following values
in the window must match those of a cable or cables in the catalogue:

Field name in Cable Sizing window Cable Catalogue field name


Core Grouping CoreGrouping
Single / Multi SingleOrMulti
Material Material
Insulation Type InsulationType
Core Size CoreSize
Units displayed next to Core Size field CoreSizeUnits
Screened Screened
Armoured Armoured
Earth Core EarthCore
Rated Voltage * VoltageDesc *

* If the Rated Voltage / VoltageDesc field has a value then it is used to find a valid value
in the Cable Catalogue grid. If the field has no value then does not search for a valid
value in the Cable Catalogue grid.
Click Save to save these details and exit the window.

Note: For details of the cable sizing calculations, refer to the AVEVA Electrical Common
Functionality User Guide.

12.3 Calculate Multiple Cable Sizes


To calculate the cable size for a multiple loads, select the loads from the Loads list, then
click Cable Sizing in the Calculations section of the List Tools - Loads tab. The Multiple
Cable Sizing window is then displayed.
The window will initially list the loads that cannot have their cables sized, i.e. those that do
not have supplies assigned to them:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Click Next >.


The window will then list the selected loads that can have their cables sized.
For those loads for which cable sizing has already taken place, their cable numbers and
lengths are displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Select the loads that are to have their cables sized by checking the appropriate Accept
checkboxes. Check the Select All checkbox to check all the Accept checkboxes.

Note: If user-defined cable sizing equations from a spreadsheet are to be used, check the
External Cable Sizing checkbox. Refer to External Cable Sizing for details.

Click Next >.


The selected cables are then sized using automatically assigned parameters (length etc).
The window will display the results of the procedure:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Click Close to exit the window.

12.4 External Cable Sizing


Cables can be sized using user-defined equations stored in an external Excel template,
instead of those from the selected standard.
A template must then be added to the External Cable Sizing Catalogue, from where
Electrical database fields are mapped to the appropriate cells.
Once this is done, the template can be allocated to the loads, supplies and incomers
associated with the cables that are to be sized using its equations. Cable sizing can then
take place for these loads and their associated cables.
Continue at:
• External Cable Sizing Catalogue
• Map Database Fields to Cable Sizing Template Cells
• Allocate Cable Sizing Templates to Equipment
• Calculate Cable Sizes

12.4.1 External Cable Sizing Catalogue


Cable sizing templates must be added to the External Cable Sizing Catalogue.
To open the External Cable Sizing Catalogue, click Select in the Grids and Schedules
section of the Home tab. Select External Cable Sizing under the Catalogue heading from
the list of grids that is then displayed. The External Cable Sizing Catalogue grid is then
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Refer to Working with the Data Grid for information on the grid controls including selecting a
record, and sorting and filtering the grid data.

External Cable Sizing Catalogue - List Tool Options

The following options are located on the List Tools - External Cable Sizing Catalogue tab:

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Actions Section

Open Used to open a template in the External Cable Sizing Design


window, which is used to map Electrical fields to cells in the
template. Refer to Map Database Fields to Cable Sizing
Template Cells for details.

Open in Excel Used to open a template in Excel. Refer to Open Templates in


Excel for details.

Revisions Used to view a list of all templates and their revisions. Refer to
Template Revisions for details.

Printing Section

Number of Copies Used to select the number of copies of templates required for
printing. Refer to Print Templates for details.

Print Forms Used to print selected templates. Refer to Print Templates for
details.

Add New Templates


To add a new template to the catalogue, click New in the Records section of the Home tab
to display the Template Information window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Enter the name and description of the template in the fields provided.
Click the button in the File Name field to browse for and select the template. Its file name is
then displayed in the field. The template can be viewed in Excel by clicking the Open button.
Enter the number of columns and rows in the Spreadsheet Layout fields.
The Current Revision field is automatically completed and will be blank for new templates.
Click OK to add the template to the catalogue.
When templates are added to the catalogue they are automatically placed in the cable
sizing folder defined for the project (entered in the Ext CS Template folder field of the
Project Data window - this folder also contains a sample template).

Edit Templates
To edit a catalogue template, select it in the grid and then click Edit in the Records section
of the Home tab to display the Template Information window:

Edit the details as described in Add New Templates.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Delete Templates
To delete a catalogue template, select it in the grid and then click Delete in the Records
section of the Home tab.
If the template has been associated with equipment, it cannot be deleted. A message is
displayed to inform the user of this.
Otherwise, the following window is displayed:

Delete from List Only Delete the template record from the catalogue (does
not delete the actual Excel template file - if it exists).

Delete Cable Sizing Deletes the Excel template file (does not delete the
Template File Only template record in the catalogue).

Delete from List and Delete both the template file AND remove the record
Template File from catalogue.

Click Delete to continue or Cancel to exit.

Open Templates in Excel


To view and edit a template in Excel, click on it and Open in Excel in the Records section
of the Home tab.
Templates can also be opened in Excel by clicking Open in the Template Information
window.

Template Revisions
When first added to the catalogue, a template will have no revision. Templates are
automatically assigned new revisions whenever it is edited and saved in the External Cable
Sizing Design window.
To view a list of all revisions of all templates in the catalogue, click Revisions in the
Actions section of the List Tools - External Cable Sizing Catalogue tab. The Revisions
window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

To view the revisions for a single template, click on the + icon next to its listing.
To view revisions for all reports, click Show All Revs.

Print Templates
To print a template or template, select them in the catalogue grid.
Enter the number of each selected template to be printed in the Number of Copies field in
the Printing section of the List Tools - External Cable Sizing Catalogue tab, then click
Print Forms.

12.4.2 Map Database Fields to Cable Sizing Template Cells


To map Electrical database fields to cells in an Excel template, either double-click on the
template in the catalogue grid, or click Open in the Actions section of the List Tools -
External Cable Sizing Catalogue tab. The External Cable Sizing Design window is
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

There are two types of fields must be mapped:


• Fields that will be completed with data extracted out of Electrical (Export fields).
• Fields that will be completed with the results of calculations that are to be imported into
Electrical (Result fields).
There are two main areas to this window:

Datasheet Layout
The left-hand area contains the template spreadsheet layout and shows each cell as
previously defined in Microsoft Excel. The layout cannot be changed in this window, it must
be changed in Excel. The grey coloured cells indicate which cells have already been
mapped (or linked) to a database field.

Note: To see which DataLink (field) is mapped to a particular cell, click in the cell and the
list view (see below) will highlight the DataLink. The feature works only when the
Used checkbox is checked (see below).

DataLinks List View


The right-hand area contains a list of all DataLinks (database fields). When the Design
window is first shown the DataLinks List view show used DataLinks only, i.e. those already
mapped to a cell.
Whether used or unused DataLinks are displayed is controlled by the Used checkbox. To
view only unused DataLinks, uncheck the Used checkbox. To display both used and
unused DataLinks, clear the Used/Unused filter by clicking on the clear filter criteria button
next to the Used checkbox.

Map a DataLink to a Cell


Drag the required DataLink from the Fields list to the required cell and drop it onto that cell.
If the mapping is successful the cell will become grey.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Unmap a Mapped Cell


Right-click on the cell to display a pop-up menu. From the menu select the Delete Datalink
option.
To unlink the mapping from multiple cells hold the Ctrl key down while selecting them, the
proceed as described above.
To removed all datalinks from a template, right-click on any mapped call and select the
Delete all Datalinks option.

Select a Macro to be run after values have been exported


If a macro is required to perform the required calculations after they have been exported to
the template, select it from the Select a Macro to execute after export of values list:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Command Buttons

Save Saves the mappings to the database.

Print Opens the template in a Print Preview window from where it can be
printed. In the preview, all the mapped field names are displayed in
their respective cells.

Zoom Zooms the Datasheet Layout area according to the value selected

from drop down. Use the and buttons to decease or increase


the zoom by 10%.

Close Closes the window. If there are any unsaved changes, a message will
be displayed suggesting that they be saved.

12.4.3 Allocate Cable Sizing Templates to Equipment


Once a cable sizing template has been set up it can be assigned to the equipment
associated with the cables that the template is to be used to size.
To assigned a template to a load or to a supply that is not an MCC, switchboard or
distribution board, click the button next to the External Cable Sizing Template field on the
Details tab of the Load Detail or Supply Detail window.
If a supply is an MCC, switchboard or distribution board, cable sizing templates are
assigned to incomers of its busbars rather than directly to the equipment. Click the button
for the incomer in question in the Ext. CS Template field on the Details sub-tab of the
Loads Assigned tab of the Supply Detail window (the field and button are also located on
the Incomer Details window).
The External Cable Sizing Template List window is then displayed:

The window lists the templates in the cable sizing template catalogue (see External Cable
Sizing Catalogue). Double-click on the required template, or select it and click OK.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

The window then closes and the template is then assigned to the equipment or incomer. Its
name displayed in the External Cable Sizing Template field.

12.4.4 Calculate Cable Sizes


To size cables using an external template, initiate cable sizing in the normal way for either a
single or multiple loads, i.e. select the associated load or loads and click Size Selected
Cable in the Calculations section of the List Tools - Loads tab.

Note: Make sure that the equipment in question has been allocated an external cable
sizing template before doing so. If this has not been done, an error message is
described when cable sizing is attempted.

If a single load was selected the Cable Sizing window is displayed. If multiple loads were
selected the Multiple Cable Sizing window is displayed. Refer to Calculate Single Cable
Size and Calculate Multiple Cable Sizes for details of these windows.
At the bottom of both windows is an External Cable Sizing checkbox:

Check this checkbox.


Continue at:
• Single Load Procedure
• Multiple Loads Procedure

Single Load Procedure


If sizing a cable for a single load, the following message is displayed:

Click Yes to continue with external cable sizing.


The first tab on the window, <selected project standard> Cable Sizing is replaced by an
EXT. Cable Sizing tab.
The following message is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

Click Yes if the tab is to be completed with the default values entered in the Cable Sizing
Configuration window (see Cable Sizing Setup).

Click No if the fields on the tab are to be blank.


Select the appropriate details on the EXT. Cable Sizing tab and complete the Cable
Length field.
Proceed as described in Calculate Single Cable Size to complete the rest of the fields, tabs,
etc. with the required details, and click Size Cable.
The import of cable sizing data from the template is then initiated, and the Compare/Update
window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

The window shows the differences between AVEVA Electrical data and proposed (imported
Excel template) data for the load.
To accept the changes either, select individual field data by clicking Accept checkbox for
each, or select the Accept All checkbox at the top of this window.
To save the checked (accepted) data, click Save (alternatively cancel the sizing procedure
by clicking Stop Cable Sizing).
The cable sizing values from the template are then imported and the Cable Sizing Result
window is displayed:

When the cable sizing procedure takes place, the results of the procedure are saved to a
temporary results file. This is a copy of the template file completed with the results of the
procedure. Click Yes to view it in Excel. Click No if this is not required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:23 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

If the above window is not be shown again, check the Don’t show again checkbox before
clicking the required button.
The Sizing Result tab is completed with the results of the procedure. Use the Update
button to select the cable catalogue number etc, as described in Calculate Single Cable
Size.

Multiple Loads Procedure


When sizing multiple cables, once the loads the procedure is to be run for have been
selected and the Next > button is clicked, the following is displayed:

To review and then accept or reject the differences between AVEVA Electrical data and
Proposed (imported Excel template) data for the load for each load individually, click
Process each Record and Show Differences one by one.
The Compare/Update window is then displayed with the differences for the first load to be
processed displayed:

To accept the changes either, select individual field data by clicking Accept checkbox for
each, or select the Accept All checkbox at the top of this window.
To save the checked (accepted) data, click Save (alternatively cancel the sizing procedure
by clicking Stop Cable Sizing).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:24 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

The differences for the next load are then displayed.


To view the differences for all the loads at once, click Batch Process all Records and
Show Differences at end.
The Compare/Update window is then displayed with the differences for all the selected
loads displayed:

Review and accept/reject the differences as described above.


The selected cables are then sized and the window will display the results of the procedure:

12.5 Cable Sizing Check Report


The Cable Sizing Check Report lists differences between current and sized cable sizing
related values.
Select the loads to run the report from the Loads list, then click Cable Sizing Check in the
Calculations section of the List Tools - Loads tab. The Cable Sizing Check Report
window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:25 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Cable Sizing

For each cable generated by the cable sizing facility (see Calculate Single Cable Size)
differences between current and sized values are displayed. There will be a row for each
field in which there is a difference.
The fields which are included in the report are specified on the Cable Sizing Check Report
tab of the Cable Sizing Configuration window (see Cable Sizing Setup).
Where there are differences, “Difference” is displayed in the Result column. If there are no
differences, “No Difference” is displayed in the Result column and the field and value fields
will be blank.
If no cable data has been calculated for a load, “No Cable data” is displayed in the Result
column and the Cable No field will be blank.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:26 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Work Packs

13 Work Packs

Work packs can be created which consist of collections of items with shared project
management requirements or properties. For example, all the items an individual user or
group of users is concerned with may be assigned to a single work pack. Time constraints
may be assigned to work packs, for example the required start and completion dates of
items in the a work pack, so that work can be more easily prioritised.
For a description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 13:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Work Packs

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 13:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Change Reports

14 Change Reports

The following change reporting facilities are available in AVEVA Electrical:


• Audit Manager
• Database Revisions

14.1 Audit Manager


AVEVA Electrical has an in-built Audit Manager that enables users to view database
changes made during the project in the database audit log. The Audit Log contains a list of
new and old database field values for each AVEVA Electrical object and includes a time
stamp and user's name who initiated the change.
For a description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

14.2 Database Revisions


AVEVA Electrical allows users to make a copy of the current database state by saving the
database as a Database Revision. At any time, the current database can be compared to a
saved Database Revision. The feature can be used to track changes between key
milestones in the project, for example between data when documents were 'Issued for
Tender', 'Issued for Purchase' or 'Issued for Construction'.
For a description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 14:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Change Reports

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 14:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Report Manager

15 Report Manager

AVEVA Electrical has an in-built Report Manager that enables users to create and modify
reports.
For a description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 15:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Report Manager

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 15:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

A Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

The following section explains the how the load calculations work, including all the
equations used. A definition of terms can be found in the glossary at the end of the section.
Continue at:
• Load Detail Window
• Supply Detail Window
• Glossary

A.1 Load Detail Window


The Load Detail window (see Manually Add a Tag to the Loads List) that contains the load
calculation fields is shown below.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

A.1.1 Mechanical Load


This is the data that is input by the designer of the equipment that is being powered by the
electrical tag.
The Mechanical Load field has unit values of kW and hp.
The Mechanical Load field value must be equal to or less than the Nameplate Rated
Power field value.

The Mechanical Load field has a feature that enables the user to select a valid Nameplate
Rated Power field value from the Motor Catalogue. The rule that the list of motor catalogue
records must have a power value equal or greater than Mechanical Load field value still
applies.

Note: When Load fields are populated from the motor catalogue, the calculations are not
executed. The load calculations are only executed when one of the Load fields is
updated.

A.1.2 Voltage, Phase, Frequency


This data is selected by the designer from a pick list created for the project (see Project
Voltages). The pick list should include all valid combinations of voltage, frequency and
phase.

A.1.3 Nameplate Rated Power


The Nameplate Rated Power field has unit values of kW and hp.
The system does not allow the value to equal 0 (except in the case of the Miscellaneous
Load equipment type).

A.1.4 Absorbed Power


The Absorbed Power field has a unit value of kW. The Absorbed Power field is calculated
if the Absorbed Loading Factor is set.
The equation is:
Absorbed Power = Nameplate Rated Power * Absorbed Loading Factor) / 100

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

The Absorbed Power field value must be equal to or less than the Nameplate Rated
Power field value.

A.1.5 Absorbed Loading Factor


The Absorbed Loading Factor field has unit value of %.
The value range is 1 < Absorbed Loading Factor ≤ 100.
When using motor catalogue data, the Absorbed Loading Factor field value is set to 100.
The Absorbed Loading Factor field is calculated if the Absorbed Power vale is set.
The equation is:
Absorbed Loading Factor = Nameplate Rated Power / Absorbed Power) * 100

A.1.6 Electrical Power


The Electrical Power field has a unit value of kW. It is calculated using this equation:
Electrical Power = Absorbed Power / Efficiency) * 100

A.1.7 Efficiency
The Efficiency field has a unit value of %.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

A.1.8 Power Factor


The Power Factor field has no units. It can be positive or negative.
The value range is 1 < Power Factor ≤ 1.
In the window, this is indicated by the values LEAD and LAG. Positive values are given the
LAG value and negative values are given the LEAD value.

A.1.9 Reactive Electrical Power


The Reactive Electrical Power field has a unit value of kVAr. It is calculated using this
equation:

Reactive Electrical Power = Electrical Power * √ ( (1- Power Factor 2) / Power Factor
2
)

Note: Positive Reactive Electrical Power values are defined as LAG.


Negative Reactive Electrical Power values are defined as LEAD.

A.1.10 Power Factor Correction


The Power Factor Correction field has a unit value of kVAr. It is always negative i.e. LEAD.
With correction, the loads total reactive power is:
Total Reactive Power = Reactive Electrical Power - Power Factor Correction

A.1.11 Active Electrical Power


The Active Electrical Power field has a unit value of kVA. It is calculated using this
equation:

Active Electrical Power = √ (Electrical Power2 + Total Reactive Power2)

A.1.12 Corrected Power Factor


The Corrected Power Factor field has no units. It can be positive or negative.
Value range is 1 < Power Factor ≤ 1.
In the window, this is indicated by the values LEAD and LAG. Positive values are given the
LAG value and negative values are given the LEAD value.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

The Corrected Power Factor is calculated using this equation:


Corrected Power Factor = Electrical Power / Active Electrical Power

A.1.13 Current
The Current field has a unit value of A. The current calculations below depend on the
number of phases and therefore the voltage type. The equation for voltage is:
Line Voltage = Phase Voltage * √3

Current for single phase


The equation for a single phase load is:
Current = (Active Electrical Power * 1000) / Phase Voltage

Current for two phase


The equation for a two phase load is:
Current = (Active Electrical Power * 1000) / Line Voltage

Current for three phase


The equation for a three phase load is:
Current = (Active Electrical Power * 1000) / (Line Voltage * √3)

A.1.14 Full Load Current


The Full Load Current field has a unit value of A. It is calculated using values from the
Nameplate Rated Power, Nameplate Power Factor and Nameplate Efficiency fields.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

The steps to calculate the Full Load Current are shown below:
1. Convert Nameplate Rated Power to kW. Conversion factor is kW = 1.3410221 hp.
2. Nameplate Electrical Power = Nameplate Rated Power / Nameplate Efficiency) * 100.
3. Nameplate Reactive Electrical Power = (Nameplate Electrical Power * √ (1- Nameplate
Power Factor 2 )) / Nameplate Power Factor.
4. Nameplate Total Reactive Power = Power Factor Correction + Nameplate Reactive
Electrical Power.
5. Nameplate Active Electrical Power = √ (Nameplate Electrical Power 2 + Nameplate
Total Reactive Power 2).
6. 1 Phase Load Full Load Current = (Nameplate Active Electrical Power * 1000) / Phase
Voltage.
7. 2 Phase Load Full Load Current = (Nameplate Active Electrical Power * 1000) / Line
Voltage.
8. 3 Phase Load Full Load Current = (Nameplate Active Electrical Power * 1000) / (Line
Voltage * √3).
Note: The voltages used in this calculation are equipment voltages, not project voltages
(refer to Project Voltages for details of the equipment and project voltages).

A.2 Supply Detail Window


The Supply Detail window (see Edit a Tag in the Supplies List) that contains the load
calculation fields is shown below.

The two examples below show the variations of the window for equipment types that have
busbars and windings respectively.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

A.2.1 Busbar Diversity Active Power


The Busbar Diversity Active Power field has a unit value of kW.
This is total for Busbar Diversity Active Power is for all equipment tags that are fed by the
busbar. The value is actually divided into continuous, intermittent and standby, for example:

The equation is:


Busbar Diversity Active Power = Σ (Electrical Power * Load Diversity Factor) /100
The Load Diversity Factor is shown below.

For Utilisation = Continuous then Load Diversity Factor =100.


For Utilisation = Intermittent then Load Diversity Factor = value set.
For Utilisation = Standby then Load Diversity Factor is displayed as 0.
In the calculations it equals 100. The reason for this is to enable the user can see the
Standby totals and to enable the Standby value to be used in the system calculations if
required. This is done by using the Busbar Diversity Factor field.
By default, the Busbar Diversity Factor is 0, which effectively sets Load Diversity Factor for
Standby to 0.
For non-Load equipment tags i.e. Supply equipment tags, the Load Diversity Factor is100.

A.2.2 Busbar Diversity Reactive Power


The Busbar Diversity Reactive Power field has a unit value of kVAr.
This total for Busbar Diversity Reactive Power is for all equipment tags that are fed by the
busbar. The value is actually divided into continuous, intermittent and standby, for example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

The equation is:


Busbar Diversity Reactive Power = Σ (Reactive Electrical Power * Load Diversity
Factor) /100
The Load Diversity Factor is shown below.

For Utilisation = Continuous then Load Diversity Factor =100.


For Utilisation = Intermittent then Load Diversity Factor = value set.
For Utilisation = Standby then Load Diversity Factor is displayed as 0.
In the calculations it equals 100. The reason for this is to enable the user can see the
Standby totals and to enable the Standby value to be used in the system calculations if
required. This is done by using the Busbar Diversity Factor field.
By default, the Busbar Diversity Factor is 0, which effectively sets Load Diversity Factor for
Standby to 0.
For non-Load equipment tags i.e. Supply equipment tags, the Load Diversity Factor is100.

A.2.3 Busbar Diversity Load


The Busbar Diversity Load field has a unit value of kVA.
This total for Busbar Diversity Load is for all equipment tags that are fed by the busbar. The
value is actually divided into continuous, intermittent and standby, for example:

The equation is:

Busbar Diversity Load = = √ (Busbar Diversity Active Power 2 + Busbar Diversity


Reactive Power 2)

A.2.4 Busbar Diversity Power Factor


The Busbar Diversity Power Factor field has no units. It can be positive or negative.
The value range is 1 < Power Factor ≤ 1.
In the window, this is indicated by the values LEAD and LAG. Positive values are given the
LAG value and negative values are given the LEAD value.
The Busbar Diversity Power Factor is calculated using this equation:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

Busbar Diversity Power Factor = Busbar Diversity Active Power / Busbar Diversity
Load

A.2.5 Busbar Diversity Current


The Busbar Diversity Current field has unit value of A.
This total for Busbar Diversity Current is for all equipment tags that are fed by the busbar.
The value is actually divided into continuous, intermittent and standby, for example:

The current calculations below depend on the number of phases and therefore the voltage
type. The equation for voltage is:
Line Voltage = Phase Voltage * √3

Current for single phase


The equation for a single phase busbar is:
Busbar Diversity Current = (Busbar Diversity Load * 1000) / Phase Voltage

Current for two phase


The equation for a two phase load is:
Busbar Diversity Current = (Busbar Diversity Load * 1000) / Line Voltage

Current for three phase


The equation for a three phase load is:
Busbar Diversity Current = (Busbar Diversity Load * 1000) / (Line Voltage * √3)

A.2.6 Winding Diversity Active Power


See Busbar Diversity Active Power.

A.2.7 Winding Diversity Reactive Power


See Busbar Diversity Reactive Power.

A.2.8 Winding Diversity Load


See Busbar Diversity Load.

A.2.9 Winding Diversity Power Factor


See Busbar Diversity Power Factor.

A.2.10 Winding Diversity Current


See Winding Diversity Current.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

A.2.11 Busbar Maximum Demand Active Power


The Busbar Maximum Demand Active Power field has a unit value of kW.
These are continuous, intermittent and standby totals of Busbar Diversity Active Power
calculated with reference to the Busbar Diversity Factor.
Busbar Maximum Demand Active Power = (kC * HC)/100 + (kI * HI)/100 + (kS * HS)/
100
Busbar Diversity Active Power for Continuous = kC
Busbar Diversity Active Power for Intermittent = kI
Busbar Diversity Active Power for Standby = kS
Busbar Diversity Factor (%) for Continuous = HC
Busbar Diversity Factor (%) for Intermittent = HI
Busbar Diversity Factor (%) for Standby = HS

A.2.12 Busbar Maximum Demand Reactive Power


The Busbar Maximum Demand Reactive Power field has a unit value of kVAr.
These are continuous, intermittent and standby totals of Busbar Maximum Demand
Reactive Power calculated with reference to the Busbar Diversity Factor.
Busbar Maximum Demand Reactive Power = (kRC * HC)/100 + (kRI * HI)/100 + (kRS
* HS)/100
Busbar Diversity Reactive Power for Continuous = kRC
Busbar Diversity Reactive Power for Intermittent = kRI
Busbar Diversity Reactive Power for Standby = kRS
Busbar Diversity Factor (%) for Continuous = HC
Busbar Diversity Factor (%) for Intermittent = HI
Busbar Diversity Factor (%) for Standby = HS

A.2.13 Busbar Maximum Demand Load


The Busbar Maximum Demand Load field has a unit value of kVA.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

The equation is:

Busbar Maximum Demand Load = √ (Busbar Maximum Demand Active Power 2 +


Busbar Maximum Demand Reactive Power 2)

A.2.14 Busbar Maximum Demand Power Factor


The Busbar Maximum Demand Power Factor field has no units. It can be positive or
negative.
The value range is 1 < Power Factor ≤ 1.
In the window, this is indicated by the values LEAD and LAG. Positive values are given the
LAG value and negative values are given the LEAD value.
The Busbar Maximum Demand Power Factor is calculated using this equation:
Busbar Maximum Demand Power Factor = Busbar Maximum Demand Active Power /
Busbar Maximum Demand Load

A.2.15 Busbar Maximum Demand Current


The Busbar Maximum Demand Current field has a unit value of A.
This total for Busbar Maximum Demand Current is for all equipment tags that are fed by the
busbar. The value is actually divided into continuous, intermittent and standby, for example:

The current calculations below depend on the number of phases and therefore the voltage
type. The equation for voltage is:
Line Voltage = Phase Voltage * √3

Current for single phase


The equation for a single phase busbar is:
Busbar Maximum Demand Current = (Busbar Maximum Demand Load * 1000) /
Phase Voltage

Current for two phase


The equation for a two phase load is:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

Busbar Maximum Demand Current = (Busbar Maximum Demand Load * 1000) / Line
Voltage

Current for three phase


The equation for a three phase load is:
Busbar Maximum Demand Current = (Busbar Maximum Demand Load * 1000) / (Line
Voltage * √3)

A.2.16 Load Summary Diversity Active Power


The Load Summary Diversity Active Power field has a unit value of kW.
This is the total for all busbars in the equipment tag. It takes the Busbar Diversity Factor into
account when totalling the busbar values. The value is actually divided into continuous,
intermittent and standby, for example:

The equation is:


Load Summary Diversity Active Power for Continuous = Σ (kC1 * HC1)/100 + (kC2 *
HC2)/100 + …….. + (kCn * HCn)/100
Busbar Diversity Active Power for each Continuous busbar = kC
Busbar Diversity Factor (%) for each Continuous busbar = HC
Load Summary Diversity Active Power for Continuous = Σ (kI1 * HI1)/100 + (kI2 * HI2)/
100 + …….. + (kIn * HIn)/100
Busbar Diversity Active Power for each Intermittent busbar = kI
Busbar Diversity Factor (%) for each Intermittent busbar = HI
Load Summary Diversity Active Power for Continuous = Σ (kS1 * HS1)/100 + (kS2 *
HS2)/100 + …….. + (kSn * HSn)/100
Busbar Diversity Active Power for each Standby busbar = kS
Busbar Diversity Factor (%) for each Standby busbar = HS

A.2.17 Load Summary Diversity Reactive Power


The Load Summary Diversity Reactive Power field has a unit value of kVAr.
This is the total for all busbars in the equipment tag. It takes Busbar Diversity Factor into
account when totalling the busbar values. The value is actually divided into continuous,
intermittent and standby, or example:

The equation is:


Load Summary Diversity Reactive Power for Continuous = Σ (kRC1 * HRC1)/100 + Σ
(kRC2 * HRC2)/100 + …….. + (kRCn * HRCn)/100

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

Busbar Diversity Reactive Power for each Continuous busbar = kRC


Busbar Diversity Factor (%) for each Continuous busbar = HRC
Load Summary Diversity Reactive Power for Continuous = Σ (kRI1 * HRI1)/100 + Σ
(kRI2 * HRI2)/100 + …….. + (kRIn * HRIn)/100
Busbar Diversity Reactive Power for each Intermittent busbar = kRI
Busbar Diversity Factor (%) for each Intermittent busbar = HRI
Load Summary Diversity Reactive Power for Continuous = Σ (kRS1 * HRS1)/100 + Σ
(kRS2 * HRS2)/100 + …….. + (kRSn * HRSn)/100
Busbar Diversity Reactive Power for each Standby busbar = kRS
Busbar Diversity Factor (%) for each Standby busbar = HRS

A.2.18 Load Summary Diversity Load


The Load Summary Diversity Load field has a unit value of kVA.
This is the total for all busbars in the equipment tag. The value is actually divided into
continuous, intermittent and standby, for example:

The equation is:


Load Summary Diversity Load for Continuous = √ (Load Summary Diversity Active
Power for Continuous 2 + Load Summary Diversity Reactive Power for Continuous 2)
Load Summary Diversity Load for Intermittent = √ (Load Summary Diversity Active
Power for Intermittent 2 + Load Summary Diversity Reactive Power for Intermittent 2)
Load Summary Diversity Load for Standby = √ (Load Summary Diversity Active Power
for Standby 2 + Load Summary Diversity Reactive Power for Standby 2)

A.2.19 Load Summary Diversity Power Factor


The Load Summary Diversity Power Factor field has no units. It can be positive or
negative.
The value range is 1 < Power Factor ≤ 1.
In the window, this is indicated by the values LEAD and LAG. Positive values are given the
LAG value and negative values are given the LEAD value.

Load Summary Diversity Power Factor is calculated for continuous, intermittent and standby
using the equation:
Load Summary Diversity Power Factor = Load Summary Diversity Active Power /
Load Summary Diversity Load

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

A.2.20 Load Summary Diversity Current


The Load Summary Diversity Current field has a unit value of A.
This is the total for all busbars in the equipment tag. The value is actually divided into
continuous, intermittent and standby, for example:

The current calculations below depend on the number of phases and therefore the voltage
type. The equation for voltage is:
Line Voltage = Phase Voltage * √3

Current for single phase


The equation for a single phase equipment tag is calculated for continuous, intermittent and
standby using this equation:
Load Summary Diversity Current = (Load Summary Diversity Load * 1000) / Phase
Voltage

Current for two phase


The equation for a two phase equipment tag is calculated for continuous, intermittent and
standby using this equation:
Load Summary Diversity Current = (Load Summary Diversity Load * 1000) / Line
Voltage

Current for three phase


The equation for a three phase equipment tag is calculated for continuous, intermittent and
standby using this equation:
Load Summary Diversity Current = (Load Summary Diversity Load * 1000) / (Line
Voltage * √3)

A.2.21 Load Summary Maximum Demand Active Power


The Load Summary Maximum Demand Active Power field has a unit value of kW.
This is the total for all busbars in the equipment tag. The equation is:
Load Summary Maximum Demand Active Power = kTC + kTI + kTS
Load Summary Diversity Active Power for Continuous = kTC
Load Summary Diversity Active Power for Intermittent = kTI
Load Summary Diversity Active Power for Standby = kTS

A.2.22 Load Summary Maximum Demand Reactive Power


The Load Summary Maximum Demand Reactive Power field has a unit value of kW.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

This is the total for all busbars in the equipment tag. The equation is:
Load Summary Maximum Demand Reactive Power = kTRC + kTRI + kTRS
Load Summary Diversity Reactive Power for Continuous = kTRC
Load Summary Diversity Reactive Power for Intermittent = kTRI
Load Summary Diversity Reactive Power for Standby = kTRS

A.2.23 Load Summary Maximum Demand Load


The Load Summary Maximum Demand Load field has a unit value of kVA.
This is the total for all busbars in the equipment tag. The equation is:
Load Summary Maximum Demand Load = = √ (Load Summary Maximum Demand
Active Power 2 + Load Summary Maximum Demand Reactive Power 2)

A.2.24 Load Summary Maximum Demand Power Factor


The Load Summary Maximum Demand Power Factor field has no units. It can be positive
or negative.
The value range is 1 < Power Factor ≤ 1.
In the window, this is indicated by the values LEAD and LAG. Positive values are given the
LAG value and negative values are given the LEAD value.
The Load Summary Maximum Demand Power Factor is calculated using the equation:
Load Summary Maximum Demand Power Factor = Load Summary Maximum
Demand Active Power / Load Summary Maximum Demand Load

A.2.25 Load Summary Maximum Demand Current


The Load Summary Maximum Demand Current field has a unit value of A.
This is the total for all busbars in the equipment tag.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

The current calculations below depend on the number of phases and therefore the voltage
type. The equation for voltage is:
Line Voltage = Phase Voltage * √3

Current for single phase


The equation for a single phase busbar is:
Load Summary Maximum Demand Current = (Load Summary Maximum Demand
Load * 1000) / Phase Voltage

Current for two phase


The equation for a two phase load is:
Load Summary Maximum Demand Current = (Load Summary Maximum Demand
Load * 1000) / Line Voltage

Current for three phase


The equation for a three phase load is:
Load Summary Maximum Demand Current = (Load Summary Maximum Demand
Load * 1000) / (Line Voltage * √3)

A.3 Glossary
This glossary consists of definitions of the following terms:
• Load Power
• Electrical Load Power
• Nameplate Power
• Absorbed Power
• Utilization Factor
• Apparent Load Power
• Reactive Load Power
• Power Factor
• Line Voltage
• Phase Voltage
• Current

A.3.1 Load Power


The load power of an item for the purposes of calculations in Electrical is the power that is
actually delivered by the electrical item. For example, a 40kW motor delivers 40kW at the
shaft.

A.3.2 Electrical Load Power


The electrical load power of an item is the power supplied to the electrical item in order for it
to supply the load power. Efficiency is given in terms of a percentage.
Electrical Load Power = Load Power / Item efficiency.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

A.3.3 Nameplate Power


This is the maximum load power an item can supply. It has the units of Watts or hp.

A.3.4 Absorbed Power


This is the load power that is required by the design. It has the units of Watts.

A.3.5 Utilization Factor


This is the term used to indicate that the load power is higher that the estimation of realistic
value. Other terms used for this factor are Usage or Diversity.
Note that in this application there is a number and description. The number is called
Diversity and is H in equations 5 and 6. The description is called Utilization.
Values vary between 0 and 1. This is expressed as a percentage.

A.3.6 Apparent Load Power


This is simply a multiplication of the current by the voltage of the item. This has the units of
VA. To fully describe this value, it is quoted with a power factor.

A.3.7 Reactive Load Power


Since all induction circuits during the build-up of the magnetic fields absorb energy and then
release it as the magnetic fields collapse the reactive load power reflects this power
requirement. It is also known as “wattless”, as it is never lost. This has units of VAr.
It should be noted that although induction circuits require this power, capacitive circuits
actually supply this energy.

A.3.8 Power Factor


This is a factor that describes the relationship between the current and voltage waves that
are being supplied.
If these waves are completely synchronised, then power factor is set to 1. This means the
maximum power is being transferred.
If these waves are completely asynchronous, then power factor is set to 0. This means no
power is being transferred.
There is a further factor, which is if the current wave is leading or lagging the voltage wave.
The normal convention is that current wave for practically all power-system loads i.e.
induction circuits, lag the voltage wave. The consequence of this is:
• Positive Reactive Load Power is associated with Power Factor = lag e.g. Induction
motor
• Negative Reactive Load Power is associated with Power Factor = lead e.g. Capacitors

A.3.9 Line Voltage


This is the voltage value between the phases of a multi-phase supply.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
Load Calculations in AVEVA Electrical

A.3.10 Phase Voltage


This is the voltage value between a phase and earth. This is the case even if the supply is
multi-phase.
Phase voltage = Line voltage / S3

A.3.11 Current
This is the current that carries the power to the item. This has the units of Amps.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
AVEVA NET Export Configuration Files

B AVEVA NET Export Configuration Files

The following configuration files will be used by the AVEVA Schematic Gateway to process
the input:
• Project Configuration
• Object Mapping
• Class Mapping
For a description of these files, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. B:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide
AVEVA NET Export Configuration Files

© Copyright 2000 to current year. B:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

Index

A add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
assign tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:16
Allocate Cable Sizing Templates to Equipment batch assign tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:17
12:20 copy tag data during data entry . . . . 8:5
data entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
C datasheet change preferences . . . . 8:7
datasheet form catalogue . . . . . . . 8:44
Cable Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1 delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20
Cable Sizing Check Report . . . . . 12:25 edit datasheet information . . . . . . . 8:19
Calculate Multiple Cable Sizes . . . 12:10 import datasheets from Excel . . . . 8:26
Calculate Single Cable Size . . . . . . 12:5 importing project catalogues . . . . . 8:56
External Cable Sizing . . . . . . . . . . 12:13 issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:23
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1 list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9
Catalogue Compartment Elements merge into a single document . . . . 8:31
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2 print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:3 publish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:29
Change Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1 revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:21
audit manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1 view and edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Compartment Element Groups and Types Defining
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:18 New Mapping Definition 3:36, 3:46, 4:26
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20 Distribution Diagram
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:19 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
Compartment Element Types . . . . . . . . 3:16 Distribution Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Compartment Elements Catalogue . . . . 10:1 add/edit project symbols . . . . . . . . 9:31
Compartment Typicals Catalogue . . . . . 10:4 create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:5
Create Compartment Typicals . . . . 10:5 create content of Key One Line diagrams
Edit Compartment Typicals . . . . . 10:15 9:17
Update Compartments with Changes 10:16 list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
pre-defined symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 9:31
D user-defined symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 9:32
view/edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:7
Data Grid Distribution Diagrams List
working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6 access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1 Document List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:38
access list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9

© Copyright 2000 to current year. Index page 1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

E access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1, 7:1


add a tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3
Edit Multiple Loads Tag Formats . . . . . 4:16 add new tag . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3, 5:2, 7:2
Electrical Engineer Features . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 assign loads to supplies . . . . . . . . . 4:19
Equipment List assign, view and edit datasheets . . 4:21
add a tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2 attachments (external documents) 4:45
edit a tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:6 copy loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:22
edit multiple equipment details . . . . . 7:9 edit a tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12
import data edit multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:15
AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:11 edit multiple tags details . . . . . . . . 4:15
AVEVA Schematic Model . . . . 7:12 grid picklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2
AVEVA Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:12 import data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:22
Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:11 AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:31
Export AVEVA Schematic Model . . . . 4:34
Data from Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:7 AVEVA Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:37
datasheets to specified folder . . . . . 11:2 Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:23
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:8
Reports and Associated Data . . . . . 11:8
Selected Datasheet Files . . . . . . . . 11:1
M
to AVEVA NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5 Map Database Fields to Cable Sizing Template
to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1 Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:17
to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1 Motor Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:18
to XPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1 Create Catalogue Motor . . . . . . . 10:19
External Cable Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:13 Edit Catalogue Motor . . . . . . . . . . 10:20
Allocate Cable Sizing Templates to Equip- import data
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:20 AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:21
Calculate Cable Sizes . . . . . . . . . 12:21 AVEVA Schematic Model . . . 10:22
External Cable Sizing Catalogue . 12:13 AVEVA Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:22
Map Database Fields to Cable Sizing Tem- Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:21
plate Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:17
P
F
Packages List
Find and Replace access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Text in a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6 Project tab
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
G Project Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:14
Property Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4, 3:5
Grid Filters
advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Grid Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
R
Report Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1
I
Instrument List
S
import data Supplies List
AVEVADiagrams data import configura- access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:39 add a tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
assign, view and edit datasheets . . 5:49
L attachments (external documents) 5:51
copy supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:50
Load Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1 edit a tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:46
Loading Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:48 edit multiple tags details . . . . . . . . 5:49
Loads List grid picklists . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2, 6:2, 7:1

© Copyright 2000 to current year. Index page 2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Engineer User Guide

import data . . . . . . . . . 5:50, 7:11, 10:21


AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:50
AVEVA Schematic Model . . . . 5:50
AVEVA Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:50
Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:50
Supplies list
assign loads to supplies . . . . . . 5:6, 5:8

T
Tag Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:22
edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:27
new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:24

U
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
ribbon menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2

V
View data by datasheet form type . . . . . 8:59

W
Work Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1

© Copyright 2000 to current year. Index page 3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.

You might also like